Home

HP Q.11. (2510-24) User's Manual

1. Do These Steps Before You Configure 802 1X Operation Overview Configuring 802 1X Authentication on the Switch Configuring Switch Ports as 802 1X Authenticators 1 Enable 802 1X Authentication on Selected Ports 2 Reconfigure Settings for Port Access 00 02 e aes 3 Configure the 802 1X Authentication Method 4 Enter the RADIUS Host IP Address es 2 0 5 5 Enable 802 1X Authentication on the Switch 6 Optionally Resetting Authenticator Operation 802 1X Open VLAN Mode 2 cece cee eens Introduction eneas ete See oA ee ges Rea Cea VLAN Membership Priorities 00 0 0 e cece eee eee Use Models for 802 1X Open VLAN Modes 0 Operating Rules for Authorized Client and Unauthorized Client VLANS 0 0 c ccc ee een eens Setting Up and Configuring 802 1X Open VLAN Mode 802 1X Open VLAN Operating Notes 20sec e eee Option For Authenticator Ports Configure Port Security To Allow Only 80 IX Devices 6 nn a ne bd be ce ee eee gias Configuring Switch Ports To Operate As Supplicants for 802 1X Connections to Other Switches Displaying 802 1X Configuration Statistics and Counters Show Commands for Port Access Authenticator Viewing 802 1X Open VLAN Mode Status
2. 9 6 Retention of Static MAC Addresses 000 eee eeeee 9 10 Displaying Current Port Security Settings 9 10 Configuring Port Security 00 c cece eee 9 12 Web Displaying and Configuring Port Security Features 9 17 Reading Intrusion Alerts and Resetting Alert Flags 9 17 Notice of Security Violations 0 c eee ee eee eens 9 17 How the Intrusion Log Operates 0 0 cece cece eens 9 18 Keeping the Intrusion Log Current by Resetting Alert Flags 9 19 Using the Event Log To Find Intrusion Alerts 9 24 Web Checking for Intrusions Listing Intrusion Alerts and Resetting Alert Flags 2 0 cece eee eee eens 9 25 Operating Notes for Port Security 0 0 cece ccc eee ee 9 25 Configuring Protected Ports 00 cece cee eee eee 9 27 9 1 Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Overview Note Note Overview Port security is not available on ports running at 10 Mbps or the 1000 Mbps uplinks It is only available on ports running at 100 mbps Feature Default Menu CLI Web Displaying Current Port Security n a page 9 10 page 9 17 Configuring Port Security disabled page 9 12 page 9 17 Intrusion Alerts and Alert Flags n a page 9 24 page 9 22 page 9 25 Using Port Security you can configure each switch port with a unique list of the MAC addresses of devices tha
3. Displaying 802 1X Configuration Statistics and Counters Show Commands for Port Access Authenticator Viewing 802 1X Open VLAN Mode Status 2 Show Commands for Port Access Supplicant How RADIUS 802 1X Authentication Affects VLAN Operation Messages Related to 802 1X Operation 0 2 0 0 eee ee eee 8 2 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Overview Overview Default Menu CLI Web Configuring Switch Ports as 802 1X Authenticators Disabled n a page 8 17 n a Configuring 802 1X Open VLAN Mode Disabled n a page 8 26 n a Configuring Switch Ports to Operate as 802 1X Supplicants Disabled n a page 8 42 n a Displaying 802 1X Configuration Statistics and Counters n a n a page 8 47 n a How 802 1X Affects VLAN Operation n a n a page 8 54 n a RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Refer to RADIUS Authentication and Accounting on page 5 1 Why Use Port Based or Client Based Access Control Local Area Networks are often deployed in a way that allows unauthorized clients to attach to network devices or allows unauthorized users to get access to unattended clients on a network Also the use of DHCP services and zero configuration make access to networking services easily available This exposes the network to unauthorized use and malicious attacks While access to the network should be made easy uncontrolled and un
4. l 4 l L Figure 7 1 Switch User Authentication SSL on the ProCurve switches supports these data encryption methods m 38DES 168 bit 112 Effective m DES 56 bit m RC4 40 bit 128 bit Note ProCurve switches use RSA public key algorithms and Diffie Hellman All references to a key mean keys generated using these algorithms unless otherwise noted Terminology m SSL Server A ProCurve switch with SSL enabled m Key Pair Public private pair of RSA keys generated by switch of which public portion makes up part of server host certificate and private portion is stored in switch flash not user accessible Digital Certificate A certificate is an electronic passport that is used to establish the credentials of the subject to which the certificate was issued Information contained within the certificate includes name of the subject serial number date of validity subject s public key and the digital signature of the authority who issued the certifi cate Certificates on Procurve switches conform to the X 509v3 stan dard which defines the format of the certificate 7 3 Configuring Secure Socket Layer SSL Terminology Self Signed Certificate A certificate not verified by a third party certificate authority CA Self signed certificates provide a reduced level of security compared to a CA signed certificate CA Signed Certificate A certificate verified by a third party certif
5. 0 0 eee cece eee ee 5 8 2 Configure the Switch To Access a RADIUS Server 5 10 3 Configure the Switch s Global RADIUS Parameters 5 12 Local Authentication Process 0 0 cece cece eee 5 16 Controlling Web Browser Interface Access When Using RADIUS Authentication 0 2 0 0 cee ccc eee KEE eee 5 17 Configuring RADIUS Accounting 2 0 c eee ee eee 5 17 Operating Rules for RADIUS Accounting 5 19 Steps for Configuring RADIUS Accounting 5 19 Viewing RADIUS Statistics 00 0 cece een ee 5 25 General RADIUS Statistics 00 0 eee ee eee 5 25 RADIUS Authentication Statistics 00 0 0 eee eee eee 5 28 RADIUS Accounting Statistics 00 eee eee 5 29 Changing RADIUS Server Access Order 0 0020 e eee 5 30 Messages Related to RADIUS Operation 2 0 002 eee 5 32 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Overview Note Overview Feature Default Menu CLI Web Configuring RADIUS Authentication None n a 5 6 n a Configuring RADIUS Accounting None n a 5 17 n a Viewing RADIUS Statistics n a n a 5 25 n a RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service enables you to use up to three servers one primary server and one or two backups and maintain separate authentication and accounting for each RADIUS server employed For authentication this allows a different password for each user i
6. 0 00 cece eee eee 1 2 Management Access Security Protection 000 1 3 General Switch Traffic Security Guidelines 1 4 CONVENTIONS nesa 4 Sige ee a de ee Pees 1 5 Command Syntax Statements 00 cece eee eee eee 1 5 Command Prompts 00 0 cece eee eee eee e eens 1 6 Screen Simulations 2 0 0 cece cece cece eee eee neee 1 6 Port Identity Examples 00 a EA EERTE ERLE 1 6 Sources for More Information 000 e cee eee eee eee 1 7 Need Only a Quick Start 2 0 02 0 ccc cee nee 1 8 IPPAddreSsin Seno ie ee eG Pe CR RRS OEE S 1 8 To Set Up and Install the Switch in Your Network 1 9 Configuring Username and Password Security CONTENIS soo dato ttt a a a 2 hen inch MOOD coal ee Sy eked A 2 1 OVEN VICW oieri pede il tree phe a eke ed aaa pac eee eae Rca es 2 2 Configuring Local Password Security 00 e eee eee eee 2 4 Menu Setting Passwords 00 0 cece eee eee eee eee 2 4 CLI Setting Passwords and Usernames 2 0000005 2 5 Web Setting Passwords and Usernames 000 2 6 iii iv 3 Front Panel Security 2 0 ce ne eee teen eee nbens 2 7 When Security Is Important 00 0 2 7 Front Panel Button Functions 000 e cee eee eee 2 8 Configuring Front Panel Security 00 0 eee eee eee 2 10 Password Recovery 0
7. Please wait while your credentials are verified Figure 3 2 Progress Message During Authentication If the client is authenticated and the maximum number of clients allowed on the port client limit has not been reached the port is assigned to a static untagged VLAN for network access If specified the client is redirected to a specific URL redirect url Access Granted You have been authenticated Please wait while network connection refreshes itself Time sec Remaining 20 Figure 3 3 Authentication Completed The assigned VLAN is determined in order of priority as follows 1 Ifthere is a RADIUS assigned VLAN then for the duration of the client session the port belongs to this VLAN and temporarily drops all other VLAN memberships 2 Ifthere is no RADIUS assigned VLAN then for the duration of the client session the port belongs to the authorized VLAN auth vid if configured and temporarily drops all other VLAN memberships 3 Ifneither 1 or 2 above apply but the port is an untagged member of a statically configured port based VLAN then the port remains in this VLAN 4 Ifneither 1 2 or 3 above apply then the client session does not have access to any statically configured untagged VLANs and client access is blocked The assigned port VLAN remains in place until the session ends Clients may be forced to reauthenticate after a fixed period of time reauth period or at any time duri
8. Suppress The switch can suppress accounting for an unknown user having no username Syntax no aaa accounting update periodic lt 1 525600 gt Sets the accounting update period for all accounting ses sions on the switch The no form disables the update function and resets the value to zero Default zero dis abled Syntax no aaa accounting suppress null username Disables accounting for unknown users having no user name Default suppression disabled To continue the example in figure 5 8 suppose that you wanted the switch to m Send updates every 10 minutes on in progress accounting sessions Block accounting for unknown users no username ProCurve config aaa accounting update periodic 10 ProCurve config aaa accounting suppress null username ProCurve config show accounting Status and Counters Accounting Information Interval min 10 Suppress Empty User No e Update Period Method Mode e Suppress Unknown User Network None Exec Radius Start Stop System Radius Stop Only Figure 5 9 Example of Optional Accounting Update Period and Accounting Suppression on Unknown User 5 24 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Viewing RADIUS Statistics Viewing RADIUS Statistics General RADIUS Statistics Syntax show radius host lt ip addr gt Shows general RADIUS configuration including the server IP addresses Optional form shows data for a specific RADIUS
9. 4 15 configuration timeout 4 20 configuration viewing 4 10 encryption key 4 6 4 15 4 16 4 19 encryption key general operation 4 23 encryption key global 4 20 general operation 4 2 IP address server 4 15 local manager password requirement 4 26 messages 4 25 NAS 4 3 overview 1 2 precautions 4 5 preparing to configure 4 8 6 Index preventing switch lockout 4 15 privilege level code 4 7 server access 4 15 server priority 4 18 setup general 4 5 show authentication 4 8 system requirements 4 5 TACACS server 4 3 testing 4 5 timeout 4 15 troubleshooting 4 6 unauthorized access preventing 4 7 web access controlling 4 24 web access no effect on 4 5 tacacs server 4 8 TCP reserved port numbers 7 20 TLS See RADIUS troubleshooting authorized IP managers 10 12 trunk LACP 802 1X not allowed 8 17 See also LACP U user name cleared 2 5 V value inconsistent 9 15 VLAN 802 1X 8 54 802 1X ID changes 8 57 802 1X suspend untagged VLAN 8 51 not advertised for GVRP 8 57 WwW warranty l ii Web Authentication authenticator operation 3 5 blocked traffic 3 4 CHAP defined 3 9 usage 3 4 client status 3 30 configuration commands 3 18 configuring on the switch 3 17 switch for RADIUS access 3 15 features 3 4 general se
10. If 802 1X port access is configured on a given port then port security learn mode for that port must be set to either continuous the default or port access In addition to the above to use port security on an authenticator port use the per port client limit option to control how many MAC addresses of 802 1X authenticated devices the port is allowed to learn Using client limit sets 802 1X to client based operation on the specified ports When this limit is reached no further devices can be authenticated until a currently authenti cated device disconnects and the current delay period or logoff period has expired 8 41 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Configuring Switch Ports To Operate As Supplicants for 802 1X Connections to Other Switches Configure the port access type Syntax aaa port access auth lt port list gt client limit lt 1 8 gt Configures client based 802 1X authentication on the specified ports and sets the number of authenticated devices the port is allowed to learn For more on this command refer to Configuring Switch Ports as 802 1X Authenticators on page 8 17 Or no aaa port access auth lt port list gt client limit Configures port based 802 1X authentication on the specified ports which opens the port Configuring Switch Ports To Operate As Supplicants for 802 1X Connections to Other Switches 802 1X Authentication Commands page 8 17 8
11. ProCurve config port security al mac address 0c0090 456456 After executing the above command the security configuration for port A1 appears as ProCurve config show port security al Port Security Port Al Learn Mode Continuous Static Address Limit 1 42 Action None None f Authorized Addresses The Address Limit has been reached 0c0090 123456 OcOO090 456456 Figure 9 5 Example of Adding a Second Authorized Device to a Port Note Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Port Security Command Options and Operation The message Inconsistent value appears if the new MAC address exceeds the current Address Limit or specifies a device that is already on the list If you change a port from static to continuous learn mode the port retains in memory any authorized addresses it had while in static mode If you subsequently attempt to convert the port back to static mode with the same authorized address es the Inconsistent value message appears because the port already has the address es in its Authorized list If you are adding a device MAC address to a port on which the Authorized Addresses list is already full as controlled by the port s current Address Limit setting then you must increase the Address Limit in order to add the device even if you want to replace one device with another Using the CLI you can simultaneously increase the limit and add the MAC address with a single comman
12. Radius Radius Radius Radius Web Auth ChapRadius MAC Auth ChapRadius Figure 5 1 Example of Possible RADIUS Access Assignments e Determine the IP address es of the RADIUS server s you want to support the switch You can configure the switch for up to three RADIUS servers e Ifyou need to replace the default UDP destination port 1812 the switch uses for authentication requests to a specific RADIUS server select it before beginning the configuration process e Ifyou need to replace the default UDP destination port 1813 the switch uses for accounting requests to a specific Radius server select it before beginning the configuration process RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Configuring the Switch for RADIUS Authentication Determine whether you can use one global encryption key for all RADIUS servers or if unique keys will be required for specific servers With multiple RADIUS servers if one key applies to two or more of these servers then you can configure this key as the global encryption key For any server whose key differs from the global key you are using you must configure that key in the same command that you use to designate that server s IP address to the switch Determine an acceptable timeout period for the switch to wait for a server to respond to a request ProCurve recommends that you begin with the default five seconds Determine how many times you want the switch
13. SSsssssssssssssss CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Status and Counters Port Status Intrusion Flow Port Type Alert Enabled Status Mode Ctrl 10 100Tx The Intrusion Alert A2 10 100TxX No Yes Up Auto off column shows Yes A3 10 100Tx Yes Yes Up Auto off for any port on which A4 10 100TX No Yes Up Auto off a security violation A5 10 100TX No Yes Up Auto off mein d d AG 10 100Tx No Yes Down Auto off as been detected A7 10 100TX No Yes Up Auto off Ag 10 100Tx No Yes Down Auto off Actions gt Back Intrusion log Help Return to previous screen Use up down arrow keys to scroll to other entries left right arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to execute action Figure 9 9 Example of Port Status Screen with Intrusion Alert on Port A3 2 Type I Intrusion log to display the Intrusion Log CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Status and Counters Intrusion Log MAC Address of s Intruding Device MAC Address Date Time g System Time of Intrusion on Port A3 on Port A3 IPA l 0060b0 896e00 08 08 02 15 28 21 AZ 080009 cf558f prior to 08 08 02 10 28 58 Indicates this intrusion on port A3 occurred priorto a reset reboot at the indicated time and date Actions gt Reset alert flags Help Return to pr us en Use up down arrow keys to scroll to other entries left right arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to execute
14. e EAP RADIUS This option requires your RADIUS server application to support EAP authentication for 802 1X e CHAP MD5 RADIUS This option requires your RADIUS server application to support CHAP MD5 authentication See page 8 23 If you select either eap radius or chap radius for step 3 use the radius host command to configure up to three RADIUS server IP address es on the switch See page 8 24 Enable 802 1X authentication on the switch See page 8 17 Test both the authorized and unauthorized access to your system to ensure that the 802 1X authentication works properly on the ports you have configured for port access If you want to implement the optional port security feature step 7 on the switch you should first ensure that the ports you have configured as 802 1X authenticators operate as expected Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X General Setup Procedure for 802 1X Access Control If you are using Port Security on the switch configure the switch to allow only 802 1X access on ports configured for 802 1X operation and if desired the action to take if an unauthorized device attempts access through an 802 1X port See page 8 40 If you want a port on the switch to operate as a supplicant in a connection with a port operating as an 802 1X authenticator on another device then configure the supplicant operation Refer to Configuring Switch Ports To Operate As Supplicants for 802 1X C
15. 443 Certificate Request Send to Certificate Authority CA BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST MI IBNTCB 4A IBADB 9IMRCwF OYDVOQDEW4xMC 4yNTUUMjU1Lj I1NTETMBEGALUEBXMK Um92ZXZpbGx LIDELMAKGA1UECBMCQZExCzAJBgNVBAYTALVTIMRqwF g YDVQQKEWw9 I ZXdsZXROIFBhYZ2thcemQxGTAXBgNVBASTEFBybONicnZ LIES ldHdvcmswWjANBgkq hkiG9w0 BAQEFAANJADBGAKEAz 8WqGkx 8darWCqFO3 DnouAVZ 62DQulsaZVba2fs LZrSZ042VbYeBk vZ2hKpDoJwpIXcoO P PKkQnhNZNZkvaowIBI6AAMANGCSqGSIb3 DQEBBAUAAOBAKdGv2 rt P2G8d6R64b rJAZVTz4STP1pR3Loqahax8 j pevA Ue jwM BVPLcwJkVyd1Yt14GoApCz1 wz5Cpi6MKA Certificate Request Reply Paste CA reply here Certificate Request Reply BEGIN CERTIFICATE MIICZDCCAc2gAwIBAgIDMA0XMA0GCSqGSIb3DQEBBAUAMIGHMQswCQYDVQQGEwJa QTEiMCAGA1UECBMZRK9SIFRFU1RJTkcgUFVSUE9TRVMgT05MWTEdMBsGA1UEChMU VGhhd3RITENIcnRpZmljYXRpb24xFzAVBgNVBASTDIRFU1QgVEVTVCBURVNUMRww GgYDVQQDExNUaGF3dGUgVGVzdCBDQSBSb290MB4XDTAyMTEyMjlyNTIxN loXDTAy MTIxMzlyNTIxN lowgYQxCzAJBgNVBAYTAlpBMRUWEWYDVQQIEWxXZXNOZXJuIENh cGUxEjAQBgNVBAcTCUNhcGUg VG93bjEUMBIGA 1 UEChMLT3Bwb3J0dWSpdGkxGDAW BgNVBAsTD09ubGluZSBTZXJ2aWNIczEaMBgGA 1 UEAxMRd3d3LmZvendhemQuY 28u emEwWjANBgkqhkiG9wOBAQEFAANJADBGAKEA0 aMcXgVruVixw xuASfj6G4gvXe OuqQ7wI7sgvnTwJy9Hfdb V3Zto9fdA9ZIA 6EqeWchkoMCY dle3 YrrjsSRwwIBA6M1 MCMwEwYDVROIBAwwCgYIKw YBBQUHAWEWDAYDVROTAQH BAIWADANBgkqhkiG9w0B zi Abort Request F Apply Changes Clear Changes Figure 7 7 Example of a Certificate Request and Reply 3 Enable SSL on the Switch and
16. 5 24 accounting network 5 22 accounting operating rules 5 19 accounting server failure 5 19 accounting session blocking 5 24 accounting start stop method 5 23 accounting statistics terms 5 27 accounting stop only method 5 23 accounting system 5 18 5 22 authentication options 5 2 authentication local 5 16 authorized IP managers precedence 10 2 bypass RADIUS server 5 9 commands accounting 5 17 commands switch 5 6 configuration outline 5 7 configure server access 5 10 configuring switch global parameters 5 12 general setup 5 5 local authentication 5 9 MD5 5 4 messages 5 32 network accounting 5 18 operating rules switch 5 4 security 5 9 security note 5 2 server access order 5 19 server access order changing 5 30 servers multiple 5 13 show accounting 5 29 show authentication 5 28 SNMP access security not supported 5 2 statistics viewing 5 25 terminology 5 3 TLS 5 4 Web browser authentication 5 7 web browser access controls 5 17 web browser security not supported 5 2 5 17 RADIUS accounting See RADIUS reserved port numbers 6 17 7 20 S security authorized IP managers 10 1 per port 9 2 security violations notices of 9 17 security password See SSH setting a password 2 4 setup screen 1 8 SSH authenticating switch to client 6 3
17. 6 12 4 Enable SSH on the Switch and Anticipate SSH Client Contact Behavior 00 c eee eee eee eens 6 15 5 Configure the Switch for SSH Authentication 6 18 6 Use an SSH Client To Access the Switch 0 6 22 Further Information on SSH Client Public Key Authentication 6 23 Messages Related to SSH Operation 0 e ee eee ee eee 6 29 6 1 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Overview Overview Feature Default Menu CLI Web Generating a public private key pair on the switch No n a page 6 10 n a Using the switch s public key n a n a page 6 12 n a Enabling SSH Disabled n a page 6 15 n a Enabling client public key authentication Disabled n a pages 6 19 n a 6 23 Enabling user authentication Disabled n a page 6 18 n a The ProCurve switches covered in this guide use Secure Shell version 1 or 2 SSHv1 or SSHv2 to provide remote access to management functions on the switches via encrypted paths between the switch and management station clients capable of SSH operation SSH provides Telnet like functions but unlike Telnet SSH provides encrypted authenticated transactions The authentication types include Client public key authentication m Switch SSH and user password authentication Client Public Key Authentication Login Operator Level with User Password Authentication Enable Manager Level This option uses one or more public keys from clients that m
18. No Method Mode Network None l Exec Radius Start Stop System Radius Stop Only Figure 5 14 Listing the Accounting Configuration in the Switch ProCurve show radius accounting Status and Counters RADIUS Accounting Information NAS Identifier HPswitch Invalid Server Addresses D UDP Server IP Addr Port Timeouts Requests Responses 192 33 12 65 1813 Figure 5 15 Example of RADIUS Accounting Information for a Specific Server 5 29 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Changing RADIUS Server Access Order ProCurve show accounting sessions Active Accounted actions on CONSOLE User radius Priv 2 Session ID 1 EXEC Accounting record 00 02 32 Elapsed Figure 5 16 Example Listing of Active RADIUS Accounting Sessions on the Switch Changing RADIUS Server Access Order The switch tries to access RADIUS servers according to the order in which their IP addresses are listed by the show radius command Also when you add anew server IP address it is placed in the highest empty position in the list Adding or deleting a RADIUS server IP address leaves an empty position but does not change the position of any other server addresses in the list For example if you initially configure three server addresses they are listed in the order in which you entered them However if you subsequently remove the second server address in the list and add a new server address the new address will be placed second in the
19. Note on Port Number on page 6 17 The client key does not exist in the switch Use copy tftp to download the key from a TFTP server Download failed overlength key in key file Download failed too many keys in key file Download failed one or more keys is not a valid public key The public key file you are trying to download has one of the following problems e Akey in the file is too long The maximum key length is 1024 characters including spaces This could also mean that two or more keys are merged together instead of being separated by a lt CR gt lt LF gt e There are more than ten public keys in the key file and switch total Delete some keys from the switch or file The switch does not detect duplicate keys e One or more keys in the file is corrupted or is not a valid rsa public key Refer to To Create a Client Public Key Text File on page 24 for information on client public key properties Error Requested keyfile does not exist The client key does not exist in the switch Use copy tftp to download the key from a TFIP server 6 29 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Messages Related to SSH Operation Message Generating new RSA host key If the cache is depleted this could take up to two minutes After you execute the crypto key generate ssh rsa command the switch displays this message while it is generating the key Host RSA key file corrupt or not f
20. This example enables ports A10 A12 to operate as authenticators and then configures the ports for client based authentication ProCurve config aaa port access authenticator al0 Al12 ProCurve config aaa port access authenticator al0 Al2 client limit 2 Figure 8 3 Example of Configuring Client Based 802 1X Authentication Example Configuring Port Based 802 1X Authentication This example enables ports A13 A15 to operate as authenticators and then configures the ports for port based authentication ProCurve config aaa port access authenticator al3 al15 Figure 8 4 Example of Configuring Port Based 802 1X Authentication 8 19 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Configuring Switch Ports as 802 1X Authenticators 2 Reconfigure Settings for Port Access The commands in this section are initially set by default and can be reconfig ured as needed Syntax aaa port access authenticator lt port list gt control lt authorized auto unauthorized gt Controls authentication mode on the specified port authorized Also termed Force Authorized Gives access to a device connected to the port In this case the device does not have to provide S02 1X credentials or support 802 1X authentication You can still configure console Telnet or SSH security on the port auto the default The device connected to the port must support 802 1X authentication and provide valid
21. Using port based 802 1X authentication when a port on the switch is configured as an authenticator one authenticated client opens the port Other clients that are not running an 802 1X supplicant applica tion can have access to the switch and network through the opened 8 12 Note on 802 1X and LACP Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X General Operating Rules and Notes port If another client uses an 802 1X supplicant application to access the opened port then a re authentication occurs using the RADIUS configuration response for the latest client to authenticate To control access by all clients use the client based method Ifa port on switch A is configured as an 802 1X supplicant and is connected to a port on another switch B that is not 802 1X aware access to switch B will occur without 802 1X security protection m You can configure a port as both an 802 1X authenticator and an 802 1X supplicant Ifa port on switch A is configured as both an 802 1X authenticator and supplicant and is connected to a port on another switch B that is not 802 1X aware access to switch B will occur without 802 1X security protection but switch B will not be allowed access to switch A Ifaclient already has access to a switch port when you configure the port for 802 1X authenticator operation the port will block the client from further network access until
22. local Use the switch s local username and password for supplicant authentication eap radius Use EAP RADIUS authentication Refer to the documentation for your RADIUS server chap radius Use CHAP RADIUS MD 5 authentication Refer to the documentation for your RADIUS server appli cation For example to enable the switch to perform 802 1X authentication using one or more EAP capable RADIUS servers ProCurve config aaa authentication port access eap radius Configuration command ProCurve config show auth for EAP RADIUS authentication Status and Counters Authentication Information Login Attempts 3 Login Login Enable Enable Access Task Primary Secondary Primary Secondary 802 1X Port Access Port Access EapRadius lt __ configured for EAP SSH Local RADIUS authentication Figure 8 5 Example of 802 1X Port Access Authentication 8 23 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Configuring Switch Ports as 802 1X Authenticators 4 Enter the RADIUS Host IP Address es If you selected either eap radius or chap radius for the authentication method configure the switch to use 1 to 3 RADIUS servers for authentication The following syntax shows the basic commands For coverage of all commands related to RADIUS server configuration refer to RADIUS Authentication and Accounting on page 5 1 Syntax radius host lt ip address gt Add
23. 4 19 TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Switch Note First Choice To delete a per server encryption key in the switch re enter the tacacs server host command without the key parameter For example if you have north01 configured as the encryption key for a TACACS server with an IP address of 10 28 227 104 and you want to eliminate the key you would use this command ProCurve config tacacs server host 10 28 227 104 The show tacacs command lists the global encryption key if configured However to view any configured per server encryption keys you must use show config or show config running if you have made TACACS configuration changes without executing write mem Configuring the Timeout Period The timeout period specifies how long the switch waits for a response to an authentication request from a TACACS server before either sending a new request to the next server in the switch s Server IP Address list or using the local authentication option For example to change the timeout period from 5 seconds the default to 3 seconds ProCurve config tacacs server timeout 3 How Authentication Operates General Authentication Process Using a TACACS Server Authentication through a TACACS server operates generally as described below For specific operating details refer to the documentation you received with your TACACS server application Terminal A Directly Accessing This TACACS S
24. Configuring Multiple Stations Per Authorized Manager IP Entry The mask determines whether the IP address ofa station on the network meets the criteria you specify That is for a given Authorized Manager entry the switch applies the IP mask to the IP address you specify to determine a range of authorized IP addresses for management access As described above that range can be as small as one IP address if 255 is set for all octets in the mask or can include multiple IP addresses if one or more octets in the mask are set to less than 255 If a bit in an octet of the mask is on set to 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address of a potentially authorized station must match the same bit in the IP address you entered in the Authorized Manager IP list Conversely if a bit in an octet of the mask is off set to 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address of a potentially authorized station on the network does not have to match its counterpart in the IP address you entered in the Authorized Manager IP list Thus in the example shown above a 255 in an IP Mask octet all bits in the octet are on means only one value is allowed for that octet the value you specify in the corresponding octet of the Authorized Manager IP list A 0 all bits in the octet are off means that any value from 0 to 255 is allowed in the corresponding octet in the IP address of an authorized station You can also specify a s
25. Ifthere is not a match and you have not configured the switch to accept alogin password as a secondary authentication method the switch denies SSH access to the client 4 Ifthere is a match the switch a Generates a random sequence of bytes b Uses the client s public key to encrypt this sequence c Send these encrypted bytes to the client 5 The client uses its private key to decrypt the byte sequence 6 The client then a Combines the decrypted byte sequence with specific session data b Uses asecure hash algorithm to create a hash version of this informa tion c Returns the hash version to the switch 7 The switch computes its own hash version of the data in step 6 and compares it to the client s hash version If they match then the client is authenticated Otherwise the client is denied access Using client public key authentication requires these steps 1 Generate a public private key pair for each client you want to have SSH access to the switch This can be aseparate key for each client or the same key copied to several clients 2 Copy the public key for each client into a client public key text file 3 Use copy tftp to copy the client public key file into the switch Note that the switch can hold 10 keys The new key is appended to the client public key file 4 Use the aaa authentication ssh command to enable client public key authentication To Create a Client Public Key Text File These steps de
26. None When removing 0c0090 123456 first Authorized Addresses reduce the Address Limit by 1 to prevent the portfrom automatically adding another device that it detects on the network 0c0090 123456 0c0090 456456 Figure 9 7 Example of Two Authorized Addresses on Port A1 9 16 Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Web Displaying and Configuring Port Security Features The following command serves this purpose by removing 0c0090 123456 and reducing the Address Limit to 1 ProCurve config port security al address limit 1 ProCurve config no port security al mac address 0c0090 123456 The above command sequence results in the following configuration for port Al Web Displaying and Configuring Port Security Features 1 Click on the Security tab 2 Click on Port Security 3 Select the settings you want and if you are using the Static Learn Mode add or edit the Authorized Addresses field 4 Implement your new data by clicking on Apply Changes To access the web based Help provided for the switch click on in the web browser screen Reading Intrusion Alerts and Resetting Alert Flags Notice of Security Violations When the switch detects an intrusion on a port it sets an alert flag for that port and makes the intrusion information available as described below While the switch can detect additional intrusions for the same port it does not list the next chronological intrusion for that
27. Primary using TACACS server Secondary using Local ProCurve config aaa authentication telnet enable tacacs local Deny Access and Close the Session After Failure of Two Consecutive Username Password Pairs ProCurve config aaa authentication num attempts 2 4 14 Note TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Switch Configuring the Switch s TACACS Server Access The tacacs server command configures these parameters The host IP address es for up to three TACACS servers one first choice and up to two backups Designating backup servers provides for a continuation of authentication services in case the switch is unable to contact the first choice server An optional encryption key This key helps to improve security and must match the encryption key used in your TACACS server application In some applications the term secret key or secret may be used instead of encryption key If you need only one encryp tion key for the switch to use in all attempts to authenticate through a TACACS server configure a global key However if the switch is configured to access multiple TACACS servers having different encryption keys you can configure the switch to use different encryp tion keys for different TACACS servers The timeout value in seconds for attempts to contact a TACACS server If the switch sends an authentication request but does not receive a response within the period specified
28. Refer to 2 Configure the Switch To Access a RADIUS Server on page 5 10 m Server timeout Defines the time period in seconds for authentica tion attempts If the timeout period expires before a response is received the attempt fails m Server dead time Specifies the time in minutes during which the switch avoids requesting authentication from a server that has not responded to previous requests Retransmit attempts If the first attempt to contact a RADIUS server fails specifies how many retries you want the switch to attempt on that server 5 12 Note RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Configuring the Switch for RADIUS Authentication Syntax aaa authentication num attempts lt 1 10 gt Specifies how many tries for entering the correct user name and password before shutting down the session due to input errors Default 3 Range 1 10 no radius server key lt global key string gt Specifies the global encryption key the switch uses with servers for which the switch does not have a server specific key assignment This key is optional if all RADIUS server addresses configured in the switch include a server specific encryption key Default Null dead time lt 1 1440 gt Optional Specifies the time in minutes during which the switch will not attempt to use a RADIUS server that has not responded to an earlier authentication attempt Default 0 Range 1 1440 minutes radius server
29. Steps for Configuring and Using SSL for Switch and Client Authentication The general steps for configuring SSL include A Client Preparation 1 Install an SSL capable browser application on a management station you want to use for access to the switch Refer to the documentation provided with your browser The latest versions of Microsoft Internet Explorer and Netscape web browser support SSL and TLS functionality See the browser documentation for addi tional details B Switch Preparation 1 Assign a login Operator and enable Manager password on the switch page 7 7 2 Generate a host certificate on the switch page 7 8 i Generate certificate key pair ii Generate host certificate You need to do this only once The switch s own public private certificate key pair and certificate are stored in the switch s flash memory and are not affected by reboots or the erase startup config command You can remove or replace this certificate if necessary The certificate key pair and the SSH key pair are independent of each other which means a switch can have two keys pairs stored in flash 3 Enable SSL on the switch page 7 17 Use your SSL enabled browser to access the switch using the switch s IP address or DNS name if allowed by your browser Refer to the documentation provided with the browser application 7 5 Configuring Secure Socket Layer SSL General Operating Rules and Notes General Operating Rule
30. Subject Public Key Info Public Key Algorithm rsaEncryption RSA Public Key 512 bit Modulus 512 bit Q0 db 18 4b ce 3e d 5a 98 d8 a5 50 d5 2a e9 60 78 d1 35 82 e9 27 71 5d 45 8d 0a b9 b4 55 69 c dl 1c 4e 30 5e 20 a6 2d 62 9c 4c cd 40 aQ 6a 0b cb 1c ce 90 1 2c ad 26 fc 0b 07 ae db 11 65 d6 4 Exponent 35 0x23 Signature Algorithm mdoWithRSAEncryption d6 d 98 6b b9 a5 54 96 d9 be fa b9 99 f9 d8 6f 94 42 30 ea c4 1d 88 e6 b 19 18 22 84 f6 8c ea 46 d 7 ab 42 26 48 77 0c 60 57 8c 33 bc 08 d8 f7 c6 1f ef 15 b7 24 f3 fa 92 b1 1f 7d 9e c1 fd 83 MDS Fingerprint C969 E196 49C3 4609 AFC6 BDE1 2087 00A7 SHAL Fingerprint 93C7 0753 F805 26DC 4E39 EAF2 9C18 174F 7A63 E3CS Figure 7 4 Example of show crypto host cert command Generate a Self Signed Host Certificate with the Web browser interface You can configure SSL from the web browser interface For more information on how to access the web browser interface refer to the chapter titled Using the Web Browser Interface in the Management and Configuration Guide for your switch To generate a self signed host certificate from the web browser interface 7 12 Configuring Secure Socket Layer SSL General Operating Rules and Notes i Select the Security tab then the SSL button The SSL configuration screen is divided into two halves The left half is used for creating anew certificate key pair and self signed CA signed certificate The right half
31. This happens only on ports configured with control auto and actively operating as 802 1X authenticators reauthenticate On the specified ports forces reauthentication unless the authenticator is in HELD state clear statistics On the specified ports clears authenticator statistics counters 8 25 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X 802 1X Open VLAN Mode 802 1X Open VLAN Mode 802 1X Authentication Commands page 8 17 802 1X Supplicant Commands page 8 44 802 1X Open VLAN Mode Commands no aaa port access authenticator e lt port list gt page 8 37 auth vid lt vian id gt unauth vid lt vian id gt 802 1X Related Show Commands page 8 47 RADIUS server configuration pages 8 24 Introduction This section describes how to use the 802 1X Open VLAN mode to configure unauthorized client and authorized client VLANs on ports configured as 802 1X authenticators Configuring the 802 1X Open VLAN mode on a port changes how the port responds when it detects a new client In earlier releases a friendly client computer not running 802 1X supplicant software could not be authenticated on a port protected by 802 1X access security As a result the port would become blocked and the client could not access the network This prevented the client from m Acquiring IP addressing from a DHCP server Downloading the 802 1X supplicant software necessary for an authen tic
32. This is the default state for access control Disconnected No client is connected to the port Authenticator Backend State Idle The switch is not currently interacting with the RADIUS authentication server Other states Request Response Success Fail Timeout and Initialize may appear temporarily to indicate interaction with a RADIUS server However these interactions occur quickly and are replaced by Idle when completed 8 51 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Displaying 802 1X Configuration Statistics and Counters Table 8 3 Open VLAN Mode Status Status Indicator Meaning Unauthorized VLAN lt vian id gt Lists the VID of the static VLAN configured as the unauthorized VLAN for the indicated ID port 0 No unauthorized VLAN has been configured for the indicated port lt vian id gt Lists the VID of the static VLAN configured as the authorized VLAN for the indicated port Authorized VEAN ID 0 No authorized VLAN has been configured for the indicated port Current VLAN ID lt vlan id gt Lists the VID of the static untagged VLAN to which the port currently belongs No PVID The port is not an untagged member of any VLAN Syntax show vlan lt vlan id gt Displays the port status for the selected VLAN including an indication of which port memberships have been temporarily overridden by Open VLAN mode ProCurve config show vlan 1 Status and Counters
33. Xmodem X xiv Getting Started Contents Introduction seeni eke ace ihe ha ER Mend Goda Ge shed asec en 1 2 Overview of Access Security Features 0000 eee eee eee 1 2 Management Access Security Protection 004 1 3 General Switch Traffic Security Guidelines 1 4 CONVENTIONS ane ain he eee ie Sa ORAS a ee AEE 1 5 Command Syntax Statements 00 0 cece eee ee eee 1 5 Command Prompts 00 0 c eee eee een eee nes 1 6 Screen Simulations 0 cece cece eee eee e eens 1 6 Port Identity Examples 00 0 cece cnet eee 1 6 Sources for More Information 0 e eee eee eee eee 1 7 Need Only a Quick Start 2 0 00 0 cece eee eee 1 8 TPA GOreSSIN GS minier nea raa e E a are La Set BE EG A 1 8 To Set Up and Install the Switch in Your Network 1 9 1 1 Getting Started Introduction Introduction This Access Security Guide describes how to use ProCurve s switch security features to protect access to your switch This guide is intended to support the following switches m ProCurve Switch 2510 24 m ProCurve Switch 2510 48 For an overview of other product documentation for the above switches refer to Product Documentation on page xi You can download a copy from the ProCurve Networking website WWwW procurve com Overview of Access Security Features The access security features covered in
34. assumes that the authentication attempt has timed out Depending on the current max requests setting the switch will either send a new request to the server or end the authentication session Default 30 seconds max requests lt 1 10 gt Sets the number of authentication attempts that must time out before authentication fails and the authenti cation session ends If you are using the Local authen tication option or are using RADIUS authentication with only one host server the switch will not start another session until a client tries a new access attempt Ifyou are using RADIUS authentication with two or three host servers the switch will open a session with each server in turn until authentication occurs or there are no more servers to try During the quiet period previous page if any you cannot reconfigure this parameter Default 2 Continued 8 21 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Configuring Switch Ports as 802 1X Authenticators reauth period lt 0 9999999 gt Sets the period of time after which clients connected must be re authenticated When the timeout is set to O the reauthentication is disabled Default 0 second unauth vid lt vian id gt Configures an existing static VLAN to be the Unautho rized Client VLAN This enables you to provide a path for clients without supplicant software to download the software and begin an authentication session
35. client access is blocked After an authorized client session begins on a given port the port s VLAN membership does not change If other clients on the same port become authenticated with a different VLAN assignment than the first client the port blocks access to these other clients until the first client session ends The optional authorized VLAN auth vid and unauthorized VLAN unauth vid you can configure for Web or MAC based authentication must be statically configured VLANs on the switch Also if you configure one or both of these options any services you want clients in either category to access must be available on those VLANs Where a given port s configuration includes an unauthorized client VLAN assignment the port will allow an unauthenticated client session only while there are no requests for an authenticated client session on that port In this case if there is a successful request for authentication from an authorized client the switch terminates the unauthorized client session and begins the authorized client session When a port on the switch is configured for Web or MAC Authentica tion and is supporting a current session with another device reboo ting the switch invokes a re authentication of the connection When a port on the switch is configured as a Web or MAC based authenticator it blocks access to a client that does not provide the proper authentication credentials If the port configurat
36. crypto key 7 10 disabling 7 9 enabling 7 17 erase certificate key pair 7 9 erase host key pair 7 9 generate CA signed certificate 7 15 generate host key pair 7 9 generate self signed 7 12 generate self signed certificate 7 9 7 12 generate server host certificate 7 9 generating Host Certificate 7 8 host key pair 7 9 key babble 7 12 key fingerprint 7 12 man in the middle spoofing 7 18 OpenSSL 7 2 operating notes 7 6 operating rules 7 6 passwords assigning 7 7 Index 5 prerequisites 7 5 remove self signed certificate 7 9 remove server host certificate 7 9 reserved TCP port numbers 7 20 root 7 4 root certificate 7 4 self signed 7 4 7 12 self signed certificate 7 4 7 9 7 12 server host certificate 7 9 SSL server 7 3 SSLv3 7 2 stacking security 7 6 steps for configuring 7 5 supported encryption methods 7 3 terminology 7 3 TLSv1 7 2 troubleshooting operating 7 21 version 7 2 zeroize 7 10 7 11 stacking SSH security 6 8 SSL security 7 6 TACACS aaa parameters 4 12 authentication 4 3 authentication process 4 20 authentication local 4 22 authorized IP managers effect 4 25 authorized IP managers precedence 10 2 configuration authentication 4 11 configuration encryption key 4 19 configuration server access
37. disables LACP on that port However if the port is already operating in an LACP trunk you must remove the port from the trunk before you can config ure it for 802 1X authentication 8 17 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Configuring Switch Ports as 802 1X Authenticators A Enable the Selected Ports as Authenticators and Enable the Default Port Based Authentication Syntax no aaa port access authenticator lt port list gt Enables specified ports to operate as 802 1X authenticators and enables port based authentication To enable client based authentication execute this command first and then execute the client limit lt port list gt version of this command described in the next section The no form of the command removes 802 1X authentication from lt port list gt To activate configured 802 1X operation you must enable 802 1X authentication Refer to 5 Enable 802 1X Authentication on the switch on page 8 15 B Specify Client Based or Return to Port Based 802 1X Authentication Client Based 802 1X Authentication Syntax aaa port access authenticator client limit lt port list gt lt 1 2 gt Used after executing aaa port access authenticator lt port list gt above to convert authentication from port based to client based Specifies client based 802 1X authentication and the maximum number of S02 1X authenticated client sessions allowed on each of the p
38. i ii iii iv Select the Security tab then the SSL button Select the Create Certificate Certificate Request radio button Select Create CA Request from the Certificate Type drop down list Select the key size from the RSA Key Size drop down list If you want to re use the current certificate key select Current from this list Fill in the remaining certificate arguments Refer to Comments on Certificate Fields on page 7 10 Click on Apply Changes to create the certificate request A new web browser page appears consisting of two text boxes The switch uses the upper text box for the certificate request text The lower text box appears empty You will use it for pasting in the certificate reply after you receive it from the certificate authority This authority must return a none PEM encoded certificate request reply i After the certificate authority processes your request and sends you a certificate reply that is an installable certificate copy and paste the certificate into the lower text box viii Click on the Apply Changes button to install the certificate 7 16 Configuring Secure Socket Layer SSL General Operating Rules and Notes i ProCurve Networking gt Status Information EJ 7 HP innowardon ProCury vitch 2510 24 J9019A identity Status Gomiguraon Security Device Passwords Authorized Addresses Port Security SSL Settings Certificate Request SSL Enable Off x Port
39. icate authority CA Authenticity of CA Signed certificates can be verified by an audit trail leading to a trusted root certificate Root Certificate A trusted certificate used by certificate authorities to sign certificates CA Signed Certificates and used later on to verify that authenticity of those signed certificates Trusted certificates are distributed as an integral part of most popular web clients see browser documentation for which root certificates are pre installed Manager Level Manager privileges on the switch Operator Level Operator privileges on the switch Local password or username A Manager level or Operator level password configured in the switch SSL Enabled 1 A certificate key pair has been generated on the switch web interface or CLI command crypto key generate cert key size 2 A certificate been generated on the switch web interface or CLI command crypto host cert generate self signed arg list and 8 SSL is enabled web interface or CLI command web management ssl You can generate a certificate without enabling SSL but you cannot enable SSL without first generating a Certificate 7 4 Note Configuring Secure Socket Layer SSL Prerequisite for Using SSL Prerequisite for Using SSL Before using the switch as an SSL server you must install a publicly or commercially available SSL enabled web browser application on the com puter s you use for management access to the switch
40. lt exec network system gt 5 23 lt start stop stop only gt radius no aaa accounting update 5 24 periodic lt 1 525600 gt in minutes no aaa accounting suppress null username 5 24 show accounting 5 29 show accounting sessions 5 30 show radius accounting 5 29 5 17 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Configuring RADIUS Accounting Note This section assumes you have already Configured RADIUS authentication on the switch for one or more access methods Configured one or more RADIUS servers to support the switch If you have not already done so refer to General RADIUS Setup Procedure on page 5 5 before continuing here RADIUS accounting collects data about user activity and system events and sends it to a RADIUS server when specified events occur on the switch such as alogoff or areboot The switch supports three types of accounting services Network accounting Provides records containing the information listed below on clients directly connected to the switch and operating under Port Based Access Control 802 1X e Acct Session Id e Acct Output Packets e Acct Status Type e Acct Input Octets e Acct Terminate Cause Nas Port e Acct Authentic e Acct Output Octets e Acct Delay Time e Acct Session Time e Acct Input Packets e Username e Service Type e NAS IP Address e NAS Identifier e Called Station Id For 802 1X information for the switch refer to Configuring Port Ba
41. lt port list gt Shows e Whether port access authenticator is active e The session status on the specified ports configured as 802 1X authenticators Also for each port the User column lists the user name the supplicant included in its response packet For the switch this is the identity setting included in the supplicant command page 8 44 Does not display data for a specified port that is not enabled as an authenticator vian lt port list gt Shows per port m The Access Control setting m Unauth VLAN ID if any m Auth VLAN ID if any 8 48 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Displaying 802 1X Configuration Statistics and Counters ProCurve config show port access authenticator config Port Access Authenticator Configuration Port access authenticator activated No No Re auth Access Max Quiet TX Supplicant Server Port Period Control Reqs Period Timeout Timeout Timeout 1 No Auto 2 60 30 30 30 2 No Auto 2 60 30 30 30 Figure 8 7 Example of show port access authenticator config Command Table 8 2 Field Descriptions of show port access authenticator config Command Output Figure 8 7 Field Port access Description Whether 802 1X authentication is enabled or disabled on specified port s authenticator activated Port Re auth Period Access Control Max reqs Quiet Period TX Timeout Supplicant Timeout Server Timeout Port
42. static VLAN not advertised 8 57 I inconsistent value message 9 15 intrusion alarms entries dropped from log 9 25 event log 9 24 prior to 9 25 Intrusion Log prior to 9 21 9 23 IP authorized IP managers 10 1 reserved port numbers 6 17 IP masks building 10 9 for multiple authorized manager stations 10 10 for single authorized manager station 10 9 operation 10 4 K kill command 6 11 L LACP 802 1X not allowed 8 13 8 17 8 58 M MAC Authentication authenticator operation 3 5 blocked traffic 3 4 CHAP defined 3 9 usage 3 4 client status 3 30 configuration commands 3 23 configuring on the switch 3 22 switch for RADIUS access 3 15 the RADIUS server 3 14 features 3 4 general setup 3 12 LACP not allowed 3 11 rules of operation 3 10 show status and configuration 3 28 terminology 3 9 manager password 2 2 2 4 manager password recommended 4 7 MD5 See RADIUS message inconsistent value 9 15 0 open VLAN mode See port access control OpenSSH 6 3 OpenSSL 7 2 operating notes authorized IP managers 10 12 port security 9 25 operator password 2 2 2 4 P password authorized IP managers precedence 10 2 browser console access 2 3 case sensitive 2 4 caution 2 3 delete 2 4 deleting with the Clear button 2 5 if you lose the password 2 5
43. suppose that password clear is disabled and you want to restore it to its default configuration enabled with reset on clear disabled 2 13 Configuring Username and Password Security Front Panel Security Shows password clear disabled PE pence cae i abe eee ae Enables password clear with reset on Factory Reset Enabled clear disabled by the no statement at Password Recovery Enabled the beginning of the command ProCurve config no front panel security password clear reset on clear ProCurve config show front panel security Clear Password Enabled lt _______ 3 Reset on clear Disabled Shows password clear enabled with Factory Reset Enabled reset on clear disabled Password Recovery Enabled Figure 2 9 Example of Re Enabling the Clear Button s Default Operation Changing the Operation of the Reset Clear Combination In their default configuration using the Reset Clear buttons in the combina tion described under Restoring the Factory Default Configuration on page 2 9 replaces the switch s current startup config file with the factory default startup config file then reboots the switch and removes local password protection This means that anyone who has physical access to the switch could use this button combination to replace the switch s current configu ration with the factory default configuration and render the switch acces sible without the need to input a username o
44. switch for clearing the password Clear button or restoring the switch to its factory default configuration Reset Clear buttons together The ability to disable Password Recovery is also provided for situations which require a higher level of switch security The front panel Security features are designed to prevent malicious users from m Resetting the password s by pressing the Clear button Restoring the factory default configuration by using the Reset Clear button combination m Gaining management access to the switch by having physical access to the switch itself When Security Is Important Some customers require a high level of security for information Also the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act HIPAA of 1996 requires that systems handling and transmitting confidential medical records must be secure It used to be assumed that only system and network administrators would be able to get access to anetwork switch because switches were typically placed in secure locations under lock and key For some customers this is no longer true Others simply want the added assurance that even if someone did manage to get to the switch that data would still remain secure If you do not invoke front panel security on the switch user defined pass words can be deleted by pushing the Clear button on the front panel This function exists so that if customers forget the defined passwords they can still get back into the sw
45. 0170172004 Common name 0 0 0 0 180 255 255 255 Organizational unit Dept Namel ProCurve Networking Enter certificate Arguments Organization Company Name Hewlett Packard e lt City or location City Roseville State name State CA Country code US US Figure 7 3 Example of Generating a Self Signed Server Host certificate on the CLI for the Switch Notes Zeroizing the switch s server host certificate or key automatically disables SSL sets web management ssl to No Thus if you zeroize the server host certificate or key and then generate anew key and server certificate you must also re enable SSL with the web management ssl command before the switch can resume SSL operation 7 11 Configuring Secure Socket Layer SSL General Operating Rules and Notes CLI Command to view host certificates Syntax show crypto host cert Displays switch s host certificate To view the current host certificate from the CLI you use the show crypto host cert command For example to display the new server host certificate ProCurve config show crypto host cert lt _____ Show host certificate command Version 1 eee Serial Number 0x0 Issuer CN 10 255 255 255 L Roseville ST Ca C US O Hewlett Packard OU ProCurve Network Validity Not Before Jan 1 00 00 00 2002 GHT Not After Jan 1 23 59 59 2004 GMT Subject CN 1 255 255 255 L Roseville T Ca C US O Hewlett Packard OU ProCurve Network
46. 10 Configuring Secure Socket Layer SSL General Operating Rules and Notes Table 7 1 Certificate Field Descriptions Field Name Description Valid Start Date This should be the date you desire to begin using the SSL functionality Valid End Date This canbe any future date however good security practices would suggest a valid duration of about one year between updates of passwords and keys Common name This should be the IP address or domain name associated with the switch Your web browser may warn you if this field does not match the URL entered into the web browser when accessing the switch Organization This is the name of the entity e g company where the switch is in service Organizational This is the name of the sub entity e g department where the Unit switch is in service City or location This is the name of the city where switch is in service State name This is the name of the state or province where switch is in service Country code This is the ISO two letter country code where switch is in service For example to generate a key and a new host certificate ProCurve config gt crypto key generate cert 512 lt ____ Generate New Key Installing new RSA key If the key entropy cache is depleted this could take up to a minute poe Generate New Certificate ProCurve config gt itcrypto host cert generate self signed Validity start date 61 61 1976 61 61 2663 Validity end date 01701720041
47. 16 port lt 1 65535 default gt 6 16 timeout lt 5 120 gt 6 16 aaa authentication ssh login lt local tacacs radius public key gt 6 18 6 20 lt local none gt 6 18 enable lt tacacs radius local gt 6 18 lt local none gt 6 18 copy tftp pub key file lt tftp server IP gt lt public key file gt lt append 6 26 manager operator gt clear crypto client public key lt manager operator gt keylist str 6 27 1 Assign Local Login Operator and Enable Manager Password At a minimum ProCurve recommends that you always assign at least a Manager password to the switch Otherwise under some circumstances anyone with Telnet web or serial port access could modify the switch s configuration To Configure Local Passwords You can configure both the Operator and Manager password with one command Syntax password lt manager operator all gt 6 9 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Configuring the Switch for SSH Operation ProCurve config password all New password for Operator aee Please retype new password for Operator ree New password for Manager Please retype new password for Manager ProCurve config Figure 6 5 Example of Configuring Local Passwords 2 Generate the Switch s Public and Private Key Pair You must generate a public and private host key pair on the switch The switch uses this key pair along with a dynamically gene
48. 2 Generate the Switch s Server Host Certificate You must generate a server certificate on the switch before enabling SSL The switch uses this server certificate along with a dynamically generated session key pair to negotiate an encryption method and session with a browser trying 7 8 Note Configuring Secure Socket Layer SSL General Operating Rules and Notes to connect via SSL to the switch The session key pair mentioned above is not visible on the switch It is a temporary internally generated pair used for a particular switch client session and then discarded The server certificate is stored in the switch s flash memory The server certificate should be added to your certificate folder on the SSL clients who you want to have access to the switch Most browser applications automati cally add the switch s host certificate to there certificate folder on the first use This method does allow for a security breach on the first access to the switch Refer to the documentation for your browser application There are two types of certificated that can be used for the switch s host certificate The first type is a self signed certificate which is generated and digitally signed by the switch Since self signed certificates are not signed by a third party certificate authority there is no audit trail to a root CA certificate and no fool proof means of verifying authenticity of certificate The second type is a certificate
49. 2 10 Configuring Username and Password Security Front Panel Security e Modify the operation of the Reset Clear combination page 2 9 so that the switch still reboots but does not restore the switch s factory default configuration settings Use of the Reset button alone to simply reboot the switch is not affected e Disable or re enable Password Recovery Syntax show front panel security Displays the current front panel security settings Clear Password Shows the status of the Clear button on the front panel of the switch Enabled means that pressing the Clear button erases the local usernames and passwords configured on the switch and thus removes local password protection from the switch Disabled means that pressing the Clear button does not remove the local usernames and passwords configured on the switch Default Enabled Reset on clear Shows the status of the reset on clear option Enabled or Disabled When reset on clear is disabled and Clear Password is enabled then pressing the Clear button erases the local usernames and passwords from the switch When reset on clear is enabled pressing the Clear button erases the local usernames and passwords from the switch and reboots the switch Enabling reset on clear automatically enables clear password Default Disabled Factory Reset Shows the status of the Reset button on the front panel of the switch Enabled means that pressing the Reset button reboots the s
50. 249 4th Octet of Authorized IP Address 5 Bit Numbers Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Values 128 64 32 2 1 4th Octet of Bits 1 and 2 in the mask are off and bits 0 and 3 IP Mask 249 7 are on creating a value of 249 in the 4th octet Where a mask bit is on the corresponding bit 4th Octet of setting in the address of a potentially authorized IP Authorized station must match the IP Authorized Address Address 125 setting for that same bit Where a mask bit is off the corresponding bit setting in the address can be either on or off In this example in order for a station to be authorized to access the switch e Thefirstthree octets of the station s IP address must match the Authorized IP Address e Bit0 and Bits 3 through 6 of the 4th octet in the station s address must be on value 1 e Bit 7 of the 4th octet in the station s address must be off value 0 e Bits 1 and 2 can be either on or off This means that stations with the IP address 13 28 227 X where X is 121 123 125 or 127 are authorized Figure 10 5 Example of How the Bitmap in the IP Mask Defines Authorized Manager Addresses 10 11 Using Authorized IP Managers Operating Notes Additional Examples for Authorizing Multiple Stations Entries for Authorized Results Manager List IP Mask 255 255 0 255 This combination spe
51. Anticipate SSL Browser Contact Behavior The web management ssl command enables SSL on the switch and modifies parameters the switch uses for transactions with clients After you enable SSL the switch can authenticate itself to SSL enabled browsers The no web management ssl command is used to disable SSL on the switch 7 17 Configuring Secure Socket Layer SSL General Operating Rules and Notes Note Note Before enabling SSL on the switch you must generate the switch s host certificate and key If you have not already done so refer to 2 Generate the Switch s Server Host Certificate on page 7 8 When configured for SSL the switch uses its host certificate to authenticate itself to SSL clients however unless you disable the standard web browser interface with the no web management command it will be still available for unsecured transactions SSL Client Contact Behavior At the first contact between the switch and an SSL client if you have not copied the switch s host certificate into the browser s certificate folder your browser s first connection to the switch will question the connection and for security reasons give you the option of accepting or refusing Ifa CA signed certificate is used on the switch for which a root certificate exists on the client browser side then the browser will NOT prompt the user to ensure the validity of the certificate The browser will be able to verify the certificate chai
52. Auth VLAN ID is configured and matches the Current VLAN ID in the above command output an authenticated client is connected to the port This assumes the port is not a statically configured member of the VLAN you are using for Auth VLAN 8 50 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Displaying 802 1X Configuration Statistics and Counters m When the Unauth VLAN ID is configured and matches the Current VLAN ID in the above command output an unauthenticated client is connected to the port This assumes the port is not a statically configured member of the VLAN you are using for Unauth VLAN Note that because a temporary Open VLAN port assignment to either an authorized or unauthorized VLAN is an untagged VLAN membership these assignments temporarily replace any other untagged VLAN membership that is statically configured on the port For example if port A12 is statically configured as an untagged member of VLAN 1 but is configured to use VLAN 25 as an authorized VLAN then the port s membership in VLAN 1 will be temporarily suspended whenever an authenticated 802 1X client is attached to the port Table 8 3 Open VLAN Mode Status Status Indicator Port Lists the ports configured as 802 1X port access authenticators Status Closed Either no clientis connected or the connected client has not received authorization through 802 1X authentication Open An authorized 802 1X supplicant is con
53. Boldface indicates use of a CLI command part of a CLI command syntax or other displayed element in general text For example J Use the copy tftp command to download the key from a TFTP server m Italics indicate variables for which you must supply a value when executing the command For example in this command syntax lt port list gt indicates that you must provide one or more port numbers Syntax aaa port access authenticator lt port list gt 1 5 Getting Started Conventions Command Prompts In the default configuration your switch displays the following CLI prompt ProCurve Switch 2510 24 To simplify recognition this guide uses ProCurve to represent command prompts for all models For example ProCurve You can use the hostname command to change the text in the CLI prompt Screen Simulations Figures containing simulated screen text and command output look similar to this ProCurve config show version Image stamp sw code build dosx ndx Dec 11 2007 11 44 02 U 11 03 1340 Boot Image Primary Figure 1 1 Example of a Figure Showing a Simulated Screen In some cases brief command output sequences appear outside of a numbered figure For example ProCurve config ip default gateway 18 28 152 1 24 ProCurve config vlan ip address 18 28 36 152 24 ProCurve config vlan ip igmp Port Identity Examples This guide describes software applicable to both chassi
54. For example suppose you have already configured local passwords on the switch but want to use RADIUS to protect primary Telnet and SSH access without allowing a secondary Telnet or SSH access option which would be the switch s local passwords ProCurve config aaa authentication telnet login radius none ProCurve config aaa authentication telnet enable radius none ProCurve config aaa authentication ssh login radius none ProCurve config aaa authentication ssh enable radius none ProCurve config show authentication Status and Counters Authentication Information Login Attempts 3 Respect Privilege Disabled Login Login Enable Enable Access Task Primary Secondary Primary Secondary Console 1 The switch now Telnet j Radius Radius oI allows Telnet and Port Access Local SSH authentication 1 1 only through Webui 7 Loca Loca 7 RADIUS Radius F T Radius Figure 5 2 Example Configuration for RADIUS Authentication Note In the above example if you configure the Login Primary method as local instead of radius and local passwords are configured on the switch then you can gain access to either the Operator or Manager level without encountering the RADIUS authentication specified for Enable Primary Refer to Local Authentication Process on page 5 16 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Configuring the Switch for RADIUS Authentication Note 2 Configure the Switch
55. MAC address the port adds the one specifically authorized MAC address to its authorized devices list and the first two additional MAC addresses it detects If for example You authorize MAC address 0060b0 880a80 on port A4 You allow three devices on port A4 but the port detects these MAC addresses 1 080090 13622 3 080071 0c45a1 2 00f031 423fc1 4 0060b0 880a80 the authorized address Port A4 then has the following list of authorized addresses 080090 1362f2 The first address detected 00f031 423fc1 The second address detected 0060b0 880a80 The authorized address The remaining MAC address 080071 0c45a1 is an intruder See also Retention of Static Addresses on page 9 10 Caution When you use learn mode static with a device limit greater than the number of MAC addresses you specify with mac address an unwanted device can become authorized This can occur because the port in order to fulfill the number of devices allowed by address limit automatically adds devices it detects until it reaches the specified limit 9 7 Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Port Security Command Options and Operation Syntax port security e lt port list gt Continued learn mode lt continuous static configured port access gt Configured The static configured option operates the same as the static learn option on the preceding page except that it does not allow the switch to accept non sp
56. OVEM E iced e508 Baht eel a ks ak Bl beh Seat e ale I oh ate 7 2 Terminology eee dee ste yes sgn a a A kg a a Rede Rana ee dk ks 7 3 Prerequisite for Using SSL 2 2 eee 7 5 Steps for Configuring and Using SSL for Switch and Client Authentication 0 0 cee cece eee eee 7 5 General Operating Rules and Notes 00 0 eee eee eee ee 7 6 1 Assign Local Login Operator and Enable Manager Password 7 7 2 Generate the Switch s Server Host Certificate 7 8 3 Enable SSL on the Switch and Anticipate SSL Browser Contact Behavior 0 0 c eee eee eee eee eee 7 17 Common Errors in SSL Setup 2 0 0 0 cece eee eee eens 7 21 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Contents ie Soe eee ae et we BO eed eae E a 8 1 OVERVIEW bedi ane nano ts eda eed haa dale selene ee Paget aod 8 3 Why Use Port Based or Client Based Access Control 8 3 General Features 0 0 ccc ccc cee ence e ene n eens 8 3 User Authentication Methods 0 0 c cece cece eee eee 8 4 Terminology onra ee ee Ae eas Rani ean Pe eS 8 7 General 802 1X Authenticator Operation 00 005 8 10 Example of the Authentication Process 000 cee 8 10 Switch Port Supplicant Operation 0 0 0 cece cee eens 8 11 General Operating Rules and Notes 0 0 ee eee eens 8 12 viii General Setup Procedure for 802 1X Access Control
57. Operating Notes for Port Security 2 0 0 cece cece eee eee 9 25 Configuring Protected Ports 00 cece eee eee eee 9 27 Using Authorized IP Managers CONTENU oo ac eos ae ie nian Als ok at edema doe eae eae eae EA 10 1 OVCIVICW be hich tons piney Rada eee uae amg ea eg ie hg ee gad ONE 10 2 Configuration Options 0 c eee eee ees 10 3 ACCESS LEVEIS ure sieadeany eitce acy eines wig bikie gy huelone Re ak tle OR Ladd gtx Wks Glas 10 3 Defining Authorized Management Stations 0 0200 10 4 Overview of IP Mask Operation 00 cece e eee ee 10 4 Menu Viewing and Configuring IP Authorized Managers 10 5 CLI Viewing and Configuring Authorized IP Managers 10 6 Web Configuring IP Authorized Managers 0 02005 10 9 ix BuildingIP Masks h statis ol ie lk Wes T aati oh eee eae ae 10 9 Configuring One Station Per Authorized Manager IP Entry 10 9 Configuring Multiple Stations Per Authorized Manager IP Entry 10 10 Additional Examples for Authorizing Multiple Stations 10 12 Operating Notes 0 0 cece nee eet e een eee een ees 10 12 Product Documentation Note About Your Switch Manual Set The switch manual set includes the following Read Me First a printed guide shipped with your switch Provides software update information product notes and other information Installation and Getting Started Guid
58. Switch C but are blocked from accessing switch A by the port security settings in switch A Switch C is not authorized to access Switch A Note Broadcast and Multicast traffic is not unauthorized traffic and can be read by intruders connected to a port on which you have configured port security Trunk Group Exclusion Port security does not operate on either a static or dynamic trunk group If you configure port security on one or more ports that are later added to a trunk group the switch will reset the port security parameters for those ports to the factory default configuration Ports configured for either Active or Passive LACP and which are not members of a trunk can be configured for port security Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Planning Port Security Planning Port Security 2 Plan your port security configuration and monitoring according to the following On which ports do you want port security Which devices MAC addresses are authorized on each port and how many devices do you want to allow per port up to 8 Within the devices per port limit do you want to let the switch automatically accept devices it detects on a port or do you want it to accept only the devices you explicitly specify For example if you allow three devices on a given port but specify only one MAC address for that port do you want the switch to automatically accept the first two additional devices it detects
59. Use the global configuration level to execute port security configuration commands 9 6 Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Port Security Command Options and Operation Syntax port security e lt port list gt learn mode lt continuous static configured port access gt Continuous Default Appears in the factory default setting or when you execute no port security Allows the port to learn addresses from inbound traffic from any device s to which it is connected In this state the port accepts traffic from any device s to which it is connected Addresses learned this way appear in the switch and port address tables and age out according to the MAC Age Interval in the System Information configura tion screen of the Menu interface or the show system information listing Static The static learn option enables you to use the mac address parameter to specify the MAC addresses of the devices authorized for a port and the address limit parameter to specify the number of MAC addresses authorized for the port You can authorize specific devices for the port while still allowing the port to accept other non specified devices until the port reaches the configured address limit That is if you enter fewer MAC addresses than you authorized the port fills the remainder of the address allowance with MAC addresses it automatically learns For example if you specify three authorized devices but enter only one authorized
60. When configured for SSH the switch uses its host public key to authenticate itself to SSH clients If you also want SSH clients to authenticate themselves to the switch you must configure SSH on the switch for client public key authentication at the login Operator level To enhance security you should also configure local TACACS or RADIUS authentication at the enable Manager level Refer to 5 Configure the Switch for SSH Authentication on page 6 18 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Configuring the Switch for SSH Operation Note SSH Client Contact Behavior At the first contact between the switch and an SSH client if you have not copied the switch s public key into the client your client s first connection to the switch will question the connection and for security reasons give you the option of accepting or refusing As long as you are confident that an unauthorized device is not using the switch s IP address in an attempt to gain access to your data or network you can accept the connection As a more secure alternative you can directly connect the client to the switch s serial port and copy the switch s public key into the client See the following Note When an SSH client connects to the switch for the first time it is possible for a man in the middle attack that is for an unauthorized device to pose undetected as the switch and learn the usernames and passwords controlling access to the switch You can
61. access through one or more of the following Serial port Telnet SSH Web browser interface Port Access 802 1X 2 Configure the switch for accessing one or more RADIUS servers one primary server and up to two backup servers This step assumes you have already configured the RADIUS server s to support the switch Refer to the documentation provided with the RADIUS server documentation Server IP address Optional UDP destination port for authentication requests default 1812 recommended Optional UDP destination port for accounting requests default 1813 recommended Optional encryption key for use during authentication sessions with a RADIUS server This key overrides the global encryption key you can also configure on the switch and must match the encryption key used on the specified RADIUS server Default null 3 Configure the global RADIUS parameters Server Key This key must match the encryption key used on the RADIUS servers the switch contacts for authentication and account ing services unless you configure one or more per server keys Default null Timeout Period The timeout period the switch waits for a RADIUS server to reply Default 5 seconds range 1 to 15 seconds Retransmit Attempts The number of retries when there is no server response to a RADIUS authentication request Default 3 range of 1 to 5 Server Dead Time The period during which the switch will not send new authentic
62. action Figure 9 10 Example of the Intrusion Log Display 9 20 Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Reading Intrusion Alerts and Resetting Alert Flags The above example shows two intrusions for port A3 and one intrusion for port A1 In this case only the most recent intrusion at port A3 has not been acknowledged reset This is indicated by the following e Because the Port Status screen figure 9 9 on page 9 20 does not indicate an intrusion for port A1 the alert flag for the intrusion on port Al has already been reset e Since the switch can show only one uncleared intrusion per port the older intrusion for port A3 in this example has also been previously reset The intrusion log holds up to 20 intrusion records and deletes an intrusion record only when the log becomes full and a new intrusion is subsequently detected Note also that the prior to text in the record for the earliest intrusion means that a switch reset occurred at the indicated time and that the intrusion occurred prior to the reset 3 To acknowledge the most recent intrusion entry on port A3 and enable the switch to enter a subsequently detected intrusion on this port type R for Reset alert flags Note that if there are unacknowledged intru sions on two or more ports this step resets the alert flags for all such ports If you then re display the port status screen you will see that the Intrusion Alert entry for port A3 has chan
63. ae 10 2 Configuration Options 00 0 c eee eee eens 10 3 ACCESS Levels pine eat a ra E e EE AAE EAE A soda een 10 3 Defining Authorized Management Stations 0 0200 10 4 Overview of IP Mask Operation 00 000 e eee eee ee 10 4 Menu Viewing and Configuring IP Authorized Managers 10 5 CLI Viewing and Configuring Authorized IP Managers 10 6 Web Configuring IP Authorized Managers 200 10 9 Building IP Masks e 3 0 rnei pages ee Dawe eee Raa eee ae 10 9 Configuring One Station Per Authorized Manager IP Entry 10 9 Configuring Multiple Stations Per Authorized Manager IP Entry 10 10 Additional Examples for Authorizing Multiple Stations 10 12 Operating Notes 0c e sce cee ten b ene n beeen been eenaees 10 12 10 1 Using Authorized IP Managers Overview Overview Authorized IP Manager Features Feature Default Menu CLI Web Listing Showing Authorized n a page 10 5 page 10 6 page 10 9 Managers Configuring Authorized IP None page 10 5 page10 6 page 10 9 Managers Building IP Masks n a page 10 9 page10 9 page 10 9 Operating and Troubleshooting n a page 10 12 page 10 12 page 10 12 Notes The Authorized IP Managers feature uses IP addresses and masks to deter mine which stations PCs or workstations can access the switch through the network This covers access through the following means Telnet and other terminal emul
64. also configuring the switch for RADIUS authentication and need a unique encryption key for use during authentication sessions with the RADIUS server you are desig nating configure a server specific key This key overrides the global encryption key you can also configure on the switch and must match the encryption key used on the specified RADIUS server For more information refer to the key lt key string gt param eter on page 5 10 Default null 2 Configure accounting types and the controls for sending reports to the RADIUS server e Accounting types exec page 5 18 network page 5 18 or system page 5 18 e Trigger for sending accounting reports to a RADIUS server At session start and stop or only at session stop 3 Optional Configure session blocking and interim updating options e Updating Periodically update the accounting data for sessions in progress e Suppress accounting Block the accounting session for any unknown user with no username access to the switch 1 Configure the Switch To Access a RADIUS Server Before you configure the actual accounting parameters you should first configure the switch to use a RADIUS server This is the same as the process described on page 5 10 You need to repeat this step here only if you have not yet configured the switch to use a RADIUS server your server data has changed or you need to specify a non default UDP destination port for accounting requests Note that switch
65. and Enable Manager Password At a minimum ProCurve recommends that you always assign at least a Manager password to the switch Otherwise under some circumstances anyone with Telnet web or serial port access could modify the switch s configuration 7 7 Configuring Secure Socket Layer SSL General Operating Rules and Notes Using the web browser interface To Configure Local Passwords You can configure both the Operator and Manager password on one screen To access the web browser interface refer to the chapter titled Using the Web Browser Interface in the Management and Configuration Guide for your switch Status Non Criti gt ProCun n I roCurve Home Page identity Status Gonigurauan Security Uri insite Support Authorized Address Port Security Read Only Access Password Button Operator User Name Operator Password Confirm Operator Password Read Write Access Manager User Name L Manager Password Confirm Manager Password Figure 7 2 Example of Configuring Local Passwords 1 Proceed to the security tab and select device passwords button 2 Click in the appropriate box in the Device Passwords window and enter user names and passwords You will be required to repeat the password strings in the confirmation boxes Both the user names and passwords can be up to 16 printable ASCII characters 3 Click on Apply Changes button to activate the user names and pass words
66. authentication client public key 6 2 authentication user password 6 2 caution restricting access 6 20 caution security 6 18 CLI commands 6 9 client behavior 6 15 6 16 client public key authentication 6 19 6 23 client public key clearing 6 27 client public key creating file 6 24 client public key displaying 6 26 configuring authentication 6 18 crypto key 6 11 disabling 6 11 enable 6 16 7 19 enabling 6 15 erase host key pair 6 11 generate host key pair 6 11 generating key pairs 6 10 host key pair 6 11 key babble 6 11 key fingerprint 6 11 keys zeroing 6 11 known host file 6 13 6 15 man in the middle spoofing 6 16 messages operating 6 29 OpenSSH 6 3 operating rules 6 8 outbound SSH not secure 6 8 password security 6 18 password only authentication 6 18 passwords assigning 6 9 PEM 6 4 prerequisites 6 5 public key 6 5 6 13 public key displaying 6 14 reserved IP port numbers 6 17 security 6 18 SSHv1 6 2 SSHv2 6 2 stacking security 6 8 steps for configuring 6 6 supported encryption methods 6 3 switch key to client 6 12 terminology 6 4 unauthorized access 6 20 6 28 version 6 2 zeroing a key 6 11 zeroize 6 11 SSL CA signed 7 4 7 15 CA signed certificate 7 4 7 15 CLI commands 7 7 client behavior 7 17 7 18
67. authority signed certificate which is digitally signed by a certificate authority has an audit trail to a root CA certificate and can be verified unequivocally There is usually a fee associated with receiving a verified certificate and the valid dates are limited by the root certificate authority issuing the certificate When you generate a certificate key pair and or certificate on the switch the switch places the key pair and or certificate in flash memory and not in running config Also the switch maintains the certificate across reboots including power cycles You should consider this certificate to be perma nent that is avoid re generating the certificate without a compelling reason Otherwise you will have to re introduce the switch s host certificate on all management stations you have set up for SSL access to the switch using the earlier certificate Removing zeroizing the switch s certificate key pair or certificate render the switch unable to engage in SSL operation and automatically disables SSL on the switch To verify whether SSL is enabled execute show config To Generate or Erase the Switch s Server Certificate with the CLI Because the host certificate is stored in flash instead of the running config file it is not necessary to use write memory to save the certificate Erasing the host certificate automatically disables SSL 7 9 Configuring Secure Socket Layer SSL General Operating Rules an
68. automatically assign the first device it detects as an authorized device 9 12 Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Port Security Command Options and Operation ProCurve config port security al learn mode static mac address 0c0090 123456 action send disable This example configures port A5 to m Allow two MAC addresses 00c100 7fec00 and 0060b0 889e00 as the authorized devices m Send an alarm to a management station if an intruder is detected on the port ProCurve config port security a5 learn mode static address limit 2 mac address 00c100 7fec00 0060b0 889e00 action send alarm If you manually configure authorized devices MAC addresses and or an alarm action on a port those settings remain unless you either manually change them or reset the switch to its factory default configuration You can turn off device authorization on a port by configuring the port to continuous Learn Mode but subsequently reconfiguring the port to static Learn Mode restores the configured device authorization Learn Mode Configured This option allows only MAC addresses specifi cally configured with learn mode configured mac address lt mac address gt and does not automatically learn non specified MAC addresses learned from the network This example configures port A1 to m Allow only a MAC address of 0c0090 123456 as the authorized device m Reserve the option for adding two more specified MAC addresses at a later time witho
69. be blocked when another client becomes authenticated on the port For this reason the best utilization of the Unauthorized Client VLAN feature is in instances where only one client is allowed per port Otherwise unauthenticated clients are subject to being blocked at any time by authenticated clients using a different VLAN Using the same VLAN for authenticated and unauthenticated clients can create a security risk and is not recommended Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X 802 1X Open VLAN Mode Note Caution If you use the same VLAN as the Unauthorized Client VLAN for all authenti cator ports unauthenticated clients on different ports can communicate with each other Setting Up and Configuring 802 1X Open VLAN Mode Preparation This section assumes use of both the Unauthorized Client and Authorized Client VLANs Refer to Table 8 3 on page 8 51 for other options Before you configure the 802 1X Open VLAN mode on a port Statically configure an Unauthorized Client VLAN in the switch The only ports that should belong to this VLAN are ports offering services and access you want available to unauthenticated clients 802 1X authenticator ports do not have to be members of this VLAN Do not allow any port memberships or network services on this VLAN that would pose a security risk if exposed to an unauthorized client Statically configure an Authorized Client VLAN in the switch The o
70. by the timeout value the switch resends the request to the next server in its Server IP Addr list if any If the switch still fails to receive a response from any TACACS server it reverts to whatever secondary authentication method was configured using the aaa authentication command local or none see Configuring the Switch s Authentication Methods on page 4 11 As described under General Authentication Setup Procedure on page 4 5 ProCurve recommends that you configure test and troubleshoot authentica tion via Telnet access before you configure authentication via console port access This helps to prevent accidentally locking yourself out of switch access due to errors or problems in setting up authentication in either the switch or your TACACS server TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Switch Syntax tacacs server host lt ip addr gt key lt key string gt Adds a TACACS server and optionally assigns a server specific encryption key no tacacs server host lt ip addr gt Removes a TACACS server assignment including its server specific encryption key if any tacacs server key lt key string gt Enters the optional global encryption key no tacacs server key Removes the optional global encryption key Does not affect any server specific encryption key assignments tacacs server timeout lt 1 255 gt Changes the wait period for a TACACS server response Default 5
71. causes port A1 to wait for the held time period before trying again to achieve authentication through port B5 Supplicant Port Configuration Enabling a Switch Port To Operate as a Supplicant You can configure one or more switch ports to operate as supplicants for point to point links to 802 1X aware ports on other switches You must configure a port as a supplicant before you can configure any supplicant related parameters Syntax no aaa port access supplicant ethernet lt port list gt Configures a port to operate as a supplicant using either the default supplicant parameters or any previously configured supplicant parameters whichever is the most recent The no form of the command disables supplicant operation on the specified ports Configuring a Supplicant Switch Port Note that you must enable suppli cant operation on a port before you can change the supplicant configuration This means you must execute the supplicant command once without any other parameters then execute it again with a supplicant parameter you want to configure If the intended authenticator port uses RADIUS authentication then use the identity and secret options to configure the RADIUS expected username and password on the supplicant port If the intended authenticator port uses Local 802 1X authentication then use the identity and secret options to configure the authenticator switch s local username and password on the supplicant port S
72. ce cece ence ete teen eees 2 15 Password Recovery Process 02 0 cece eee eee eee 2 17 Web and MAC Authentication Contents ee a en noth as Fades Pa eink eats et we pia 3 1 QV ET VICW ister casts sca Beason aed horse ee Phas ee SRA a eat Saad way ESES 3 2 Client Options 2 0 2 eee ee bee beeen nee deeb E 3 3 General Features 0 0 0 0 cece een eben ene Ea 3 4 How Web and MAC Authentication Operate 0065 3 5 Authenticator Operation 00 0 cee cece eee eee 3 5 Terminology peinede webs wees sede HELE ESR en REEVE OM Aetna ae 3 9 Operating Rules and Notes 2 0 cece cece eee eee eens 3 10 General Setup Procedure for Web MAC Authentication 3 12 Do These Steps Before You Configure Web MAC Authentication 3 12 Additional Information for Configuring the RADIUS Server To Support MAC Authentication 0 00000 3 14 Configuring the Switch To Access a RADIUS Server 3 15 Configuring Web Authentication 0 0 cece eens 3 17 OVCIVICW caroge Aus se Sa ated Miele ase ae asain att RERET 3 17 Configure the Switch for Web Based Authentication 3 18 Configuring MAC Authentication on the Switch 4 3 22 OVCIVICW cas pra cia Sines eae hak teed eee ake a tae een 3 22 Configure the Switch for MAC Based Authentication 3 23 Show Status and Configuration of Web Based Authentication 3 26 Show Status an
73. config write memory Configures the primary and Copies a public key file secondary password methods for named Client Keys pub Manager enable access Becomes into the switch available after SSH access is granted Figure 6 12 Configuring for SSH Access Requiring a Client Public Key Match and Manager Passwords Figure 6 13 shows how to check the results of the above commands ProCurve config show authentication Status and Counters Authentication Information Lists the current SSH authentication Login Attempts configuration Login Login Enable Enable Primary Secondary Primary secondary Shows the contents of the public key file downloaded with the copy tftp command in Console Local None Local None Telnet Local None Local None Local figure 6 12 In this PublicKey None example the file z contains two client Client Key Index Number public keys ov OF 2002 21 25 4 ssh rsa AAAABSNzallyc2EAAAADANABAAAAGOCZ9ONEqxMHUFEC6frSspAl sa4uhlEFznFhOqmgP2 SHXYp6NR 1Q0UmACtrFU QD LIECM YMSF rN XvZH kIxTdEcSexFX 510tcKaFYzISUjK80dBMqvBGKB SV IyVEbCV wl qdaqbkaEX3d WaPS2xarLCFHsTZhnCvQTZDOGABLErlcw L 1 768 bit rsa Local_crypto Localcrypto Mon Dec 16 2002 23 01 51 ssh rsa AASABSNzal lyc2ZEAAAADAQABAAAAYODOtmzA32Z7IBgeuFINO0iXISbfooPKZ097TKCPQcxKEVE 7N eK 9MOX vnmtFuEpw ftpqhlvsE66n6FDu7W B2tkKH tqgQLFqx7GiV cxNGhbind pgsauEymsEnc1lGu LganSdan Figure 6 13 SSH Configuration and Client Publ
74. displays information on the currently installed certificate ii Select the Create Certificate Certificate Request radio button iii Select Self Signed in the Certificate Type drop down list iv Select the RSA Key Size desired If you want to re use the current certificate key select Current from this list v Fillin the remaining certificate arguments Refer to Comments on Certificate Fields on page 7 10 vi Click on the Apply Changes button to generate new certificate and key if selected Note When generating a self signed host certificate if no key is present and the current option is selected in the RSA key size box and error will be generated New key generation can take up to two minutes if the key queue is empty Configuring Secure Socket Layer SSL General Operating Rules and Notes For example to generate a new host certificate via the web browsers inter face xt ProCurve Networking x Status Information HP Innowadion Procu 2510 24 J9019A identity Gomnguration Security HEPIUESUSS support SSL Settings M Security Tab SSL button SSL Enable Of Port 443 Create Certificate Button Create Certificate Certificate Request Use Installed Certificate Certificate Type Self Signed _ J lt tomiicate Type Certificate Type Box RSA Key Size _ 512 M BA er SIZAN Key Size Selection Eas ST Validity End Date Certificate Information Fields Validity End Date a
75. e eee eee eee 2 8 Configuring Front Panel Security 00 02 eee eee eee 2 10 Password Recovery 0 cece eee runnerunner 2 15 Password Recovery Process 0 eee cece eee e ences 2 17 2 1 Configuring Username and Password Security Overview Note Overview Feature Default Menu CLI Web Set Usernames none page 2 6 Set a Password none page 2 4 page2 5 page 2 6 Delete Password Protection n a page 2 4 page2 6 page 2 6 Show front panel security n a page 1 13 Front panel security page 1 13 password clear enabled page 1 13 reset on clear disabled page 1 14 factory reset enabled _ page 1 15 password recovery enabled page 1 15 Console access includes both the menu interface and the CLI There are two levels of console access Manager and Operator For security you can set a password pair username and password on each of these levels Usernames are optional Also in the menu interface you can configure passwords but not usernames To configure usernames use the CLI or the web browser interface Level Actions Permitted Manager Access to all console interface areas This is the default level That is if a Manager password has notbeen set prior to starting the current console session then anyone having access to the console can access any area of the console interface Operator Access to the Status and Counters menu the Event Log and the CLI but n
76. each attached client Ports without any attached clients are not listed show port access port list web based config Shows Web Authentication settings for all ports or the specified ports including the temporary DHCP base address and mask The authorized and unauthorized VLAN IDs are shown If the authorized or unautho rized VLAN ID is 0 then no VLAN change is made unless the RADIUS server supplies one 3 26 Web and MAC Authentication Show Status and Configuration of Web Based Authentication Syntax show port access port list web based config auth server Shows Web Authentication settings for all ports or the specified ports along with the RADIUS server specific settings for the timeout wait the number of timeout failures before authentication fails and the length of time between authentication requests Syntax show port access port list web based config web server Shows Web Authentication settings for all ports or the specified ports along with the web specific settings for password retries SSL login status and a redirect URL if specified Syntax show port access port list web based config detail Shows all Web Authentication settings including the Radius server specific settings for the specified ports 3 27 Web and MAC Authentication Show Status and Configuration of MAC Based Authentication Show Status and Configuration of MAC Based Authentication Command Page show port acc
77. ec de TATER GEE ese re enaeerbaeens 4 25 4 1 TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Switch Overview Feature Default Menu CLI Web view the switch s authentication configuration n a page 4 9 view the switch s TACACS server contact n a page configuration 4 10 configure the switch s authentication methods disabled page 4 11 configure the switch to contact TACACS server s disabled page 4 15 TACACS authentication enables you to use a central server to allow or deny access to the switch and other TACACS aware devices in your network This means that you can use a central database to create multiple unique username password sets with associated privilege levels for use by individuals who have reason to access the switch from either the switch s console port local access or Telnet remote access a Terminal A Directly ProCurve Switch Accessing the Switch Configured for Via Switch s Console TACACS Operation Port Primary TACACS Server The switch passes the login gt 7 a requests from terminals A and B Terminal B Remotely Accessing The Switch Via Telnet to the TACACS server for authentication The TACACS server determines whether to allow access to the switch and what privilege level to allow for TACACS Server B1 B4 Path for Request from a given access request Response Terminal B Through Teln
78. incorrect 2 3 length 2 4 operator only caution 2 3 pair 2 2 setting 2 4 password pair 2 2 password security 6 18 port security configuration 9 2 port access client limit 8 18 8 19 concurrent 8 18 8 19 See also 802 1X access control Web MAC 8 18 8 19 port security authorized address definition 9 3 authorized IP managers precedence 10 2 basic operation 9 2 configuring 9 5 configuring in browser interface 9 17 9 25 event log 9 24 notice of security violations 9 17 operating notes 9 25 overview 9 2 prior to 9 25 proxy web server 9 25 port based access control authenticate switch 8 6 authenticate users 8 5 authenticator backend state 8 47 authenticator operation 8 12 authenticator show commands 8 47 authorized IP managers precedence 10 2 block traffic 8 4 blocking non 802 1X device 8 41 CHAP 8 3 chap radius 8 23 configuration commands 8 17 configuration overview 8 15 configuration displaying 8 47 configuring method 8 23 counters 8 47 EAP 8 3 eap radius 8 23 enabling on ports 8 17 enabling on switch 8 24 features 8 3 general setup 8 14 GVRP effect 8 57 Index 3 LACP not allowed 8 58 local 8 23 local username and password 8 4 messages 8 58 open VLAN authorized client 8 28 configuration 8 35 8 37 general operatio
79. it can be authenticated On a port configured for 802 1X with RADIUS authentication if the RADIUS server specifies a VLAN for the supplicant and the port is a trunk member the port will be blocked If the port is later removed from the trunk the port will try to authenticate the supplicant If authentication is successful the port becomes unblocked Similarly if the supplicant is authenticated and later the port becomes a trunk member the port will be blocked If the port is then removed from the trunk it tries to re authenticate the supplicant If successful the port becomes unblocked To help maintain security 802 1X and LACP cannot both be enabled on the same port If you try to configure 802 1X on a port already configured for LACP or the reverse you will see a message similar to the following Error configuring port X LACP and 802 1X cannot be run together To help maintain security the switch does not allow 802 1X and LACP to both be enabled at the same time on the same port Refer to 802 1X Operating Messages on page 8 58 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X General Setup Procedure for 802 1X Access Control General Setup Procedure for 802 1X Access Control Do These Steps Before You Configure 802 1X Operation l Configure a local username and password on the switch for both the Operator login and Manager enable access levels While this may or may not be required for y
80. list Thus to move a server address up in the list you must delete it from the list ensure that the position to which you want to move it is vacant and then re enter it For example suppose you have already configured the following three RADIUS server IP addresses in the switch ProCurve show radius Status and Counters General RADIUS Information Deadtime min O Timeout secs 5 Retransmit Attempts Global Encryption Key RADIUS server IP addresses listed in the order Auth Acct in which the switch willtry to access them In this server IP Addr Port Port i case the server at IP address 10 10 10 1 is first Note If the switch successfully accesses the 10 10 10 1 first server it does not try to access any other 10 10 10 2 servers in the list even if the client is denied 10 10 10 3 access by the first server Figure 5 17 Search Order for Accessing a RADIUS Server 5 30 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Changing RADIUS Server Access Order To exchange the positions of the addresses so that the server at 10 10 10 003 will be the first choice and the server at 10 10 10 001 will be the last you would do the following 1 Delete 10 10 10 003 from the list This opens the third lowest position in the list 2 Delete 10 10 10 001 from the list This opens the first highest position in the list 3 Re enter 10 10 10 003 Because the switch places a newly entered address in the highest available position
81. number on switch Period of time in seconds after which clients connected to the port need to be re authenticated Port s authentication mode Auto Network access is allowed to any connected device that supports 802 1X authentication and provides valid 802 1X credentials Authorized Network access is allowed to any device connected to the port regardless of whether it meets 802 1X criteria Unauthorized Network access is blocked to any device connected to the port regardless of whether the device meets 802 1X criteria Number of authentication attempts that must time out before authentication fails and the authentication session ends Period of time in seconds during which the port does not try to acquire a supplicant Period of time in seconds that the port waits to retransmit the next EAPOL PDU during an authentication session Period of time in seconds that the switch waits for a supplicant response to an EAP request Period of time in seconds that the switch waits for a server response to an authentication request 8 49 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Displaying 802 1X Configuration Statistics and Counters Viewing 802 1X Open VLAN Mode Status You can examine the switch s current VLAN status by using the show port access authenticator and show vlan lt vian id gt commands as illustrated in this section Figure 8 8 shows an example of show port access authenticator
82. operation expects a RADIUS server to accommodate both authentication and accounting 5 20 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Configuring RADIUS Accounting Syntax no radius server host lt ip address gt Adds a server to the RADIUS configuration or with no deletes a server from the configuration acct port lt port number gt Optional Changes the UDP destination port for accounting requests to the specified RADIUS server If you do not use this option the switch automatically assigns the default accounting port number Default 1813 key lt key string gt Optional Specifies an encryption key for use during accounting or authentication sessions with the speci fied server This key must match the encryption key used on the RADIUS server Use this command only if the specified server requires a different encryption key than configured for the global encryption key For a more complete description of the radius server command and its options turn to page 5 10 For example suppose you want to the switch to use the RADIUS server described below for both authentication and accounting purposes m IP address 10 33 18 151 Anon default UDP port number of 1750 for accounting For this example assume that all other RADIUS authentication parameters for accessing this server are acceptable at their default settings and that RADIUS is already configured as an authentication method for one or more types of a
83. packets it does not receive aresponse it assumes that switch B is not 802 1X aware and transitions to the authenticated state If switch B is operating properly and is not 802 1X aware then the link should begin functioning normally but without 802 1X security e If after sending one or more start request packets port Al receives a request packet from port B5 then switch B is operating as an 802 1X authenticator The supplicant port then sends a response ID packet If switch B is configured for RADIUS authentication it forwards this request to a RADIUS server If switch B is configured for Local 802 1X authentication page 8 23 the authenticator com pares the switch A response to its local username and password 2 The RADIUS server then responds with an access challenge that switch B forwards to port Al on switch A 3 Port Al replies with a hash response based on its unique credentials Switch B forwards this response to the RADIUS server 4 The RADIUS server then analyzes the response and sends either a suc cess or failure packet back through switch B to port Al e A success response unblocks port B5 to normal traffic from port A1 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Configuring Switch Ports To Operate As Supplicants for 802 1X Connections to Other Switches e A failure response continues the block on port B5 and
84. password method for the primary and second ary enable Manager access If you do not specify an optional secondary method it defaults to none Ifthe primary password method is local you cannot use local for the sec ondary password method For example assume that you have a client public key file named Client Keys pub on a TFTP server at 10 33 18 117 ready for downloading to the switch For SSH access to the switch you want to allow only clients having a private key that matches a public key found in Client Keys pub For Manager level enable access for successful SSH clients you want to use TACACS for primary password authentication and local for secondary password authenti cation with a Manager username of leader and a password of mOns00n To set up this operation you would configure the switch in a manner similar to the following 6 20 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Configuring the Switch for SSH Operation Configures Manageruser Configures the name and password switch to allow SSH access only a ProCurve config password manager user name leader client whose public key New password for Manager are matches one ofthe Please retype new password for Manager are Gist cre pilli ProCurve config laaa authentication ssh login public key none Key file ProCurve config aaa authentication ssh enable tacacs local ProCurve config copy tftp pub key file 12 255 255 255 Client key pT ProCurve
85. port in the Intrusion Log until the alert flag for that port has been reset Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Reading Intrusion Alerts and Resetting Alert Flags When a security violation occurs on a port configured for Port Security the switch responds in the following ways to notify you The switch sets an alert flag for that port This flag remains set until You use either the CLI menu interface or web browser interface to reset the flag The switch is reset to its factory default configuration The switch enables notification of the intrusion through the following means In the CLI The show port security intrusion log command displays the Intrusion Log The log command displays the Event Log In the menu interface The Port Status screen includes a per port intrusion alert The Event Log includes per port entries for security viola tions In the web browser interface The Alert Log s Status Overview window includes entries for per port security violations The Intrusion Log in the Security Intrusion Log window lists per port security violation entries In an active network management environment via an SNMP trap sent to a network management station How the Intrusion Log Operates When the switch detects an intrusion attempt on a port it enters a record of this event in the Intrusion Log No further intrusion attempts on that port will appear in the Log until you ackn
86. remove this possibility by directly connecting the management station to the switch s serial port using a show command to display the switch s public key and copying the key from the display into a file This requires a knowledge of where your client stores public keys plus the knowledge of what key editing and file format might be required by your client application However if your first contact attempt between a client and the switch does not pose a security problem this is unnecessary To enable SSH on the switch 1 Generate a public private key pair if you have not already done so Refer to 2 Generate the Switch s Public and Private Key Pair on page 6 10 2 Execute the ip ssh command To disable SSH on the switch do either of the following m Execute no ip ssh m Zeroize the switch s existing key pair page 6 11 Syntax no ip ssh Enables or disables SSH on the switch filetransfer Enable or disable secure file transfer capability 6 16 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Configuring the Switch for SSH Operation port lt 1 65535 default gt The TCP port number for SSH connections default 22 Important See Note on Port Number on page 6 17 timeout lt 5 120 gt The SSH login timeout value default 120 seconds Note on Port ProCurve recommends using the default TCP port number 22 However you Number can use ip ssh port to specify any TCP port for SSH connections exce
87. seconds Note on Encryption keys configured in the switch must exactly match the encryption Encryption Keys keys configured in TACACS servers the switch will attempt to use for authentication If you configure a global encryption key the switch uses it only with servers for which you have not also configured a server specific key Thus a global key is more useful where the TACACS servers you are using all have an identical key and server specific keys are necessary where different TACACS servers have different keys If TACACS server X does not have an encryption key assigned for the switch then configuring either a global encryption key or a server specific key in the switch for server X will block authentication support from server X 4 16 TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Switch Table 4 3 Details on Configuring TACACS Servers and Keys Name Default Range tacacs server host lt ip addr gt none n a This command specifies the IP address of a device running a TACACS server application Optionally it can also specify the unique per server encryption key to use when each assigned server has its own unique key For more on the encryption key see Using the Encryption Key on page 4 23 and the documentation provided with your TACACS server application You can enter up to three IP addresses one first choice and two optional backups one second choice and one third choice Us
88. server These terms apply when TACACS is enabled on the switch that is when the switch is TACACS aware TACACS Server The server or management station configured as an access control server for TACACS enabled devices To use TACACS with the switch and any other TACACS capable devices in your network you must purchase install and configure a TACACS server application on a networked server or management station in the network The TACACS server application you install will provide various options for access control and access notifications For more on the TACACS services available to you see the documentation provided with the TACACS server application you will use Authentication The process for granting user access to a device through entry of a user name and password and comparison of this username password pair with previously stored username password data Authentication also grants levels of access depending on the privileges assigned to a user name and password pair by a system administrator 4 3 TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Switch Local Authentication This method uses username password pairs configured locally on the switch one pair each for manager level and operator level access to the switch You can assign local usernames and passwords through the CLI or web browser inter face Using the menu interface you can assign a local password but not a username Because this method assigns
89. server configured to support authentication requests from clients using ports config ured as 802 1X authenticators The RADIUS server should not be on the Unauthorized Client VLAN Note that as an alternative you can configure the switch to use local password authentication instead of RADIUS authentication However this is less desirable because it means that all clients use the same passwords and have the same access privileges Also you must use 802 1X supplicant software that supports the use of local switch passwords Ensure that you do not introduce a security risk by allowing Unauthorized Client VLAN access to network services or resources that could be compro mised by an unauthorized client Configuring General 802 1X Operation These steps enable 802 1X authentication and must be done before configuring 802 1X VLAN operation 1 Enable 802 1X authentication on the individual ports you want to serve as authenticators The switch automatically disables LACP on the ports on which you enable 802 1X On the ports you will use as authenticators with VLAN operation ensure that the default port control parameter is set to auto Refer to 1 Enable 802 1X Authentication on Selected Ports on page 8 17 This setting requires a client to support 802 1X authentica tion with 802 1X supplicant operation and to provide valid credentials to get network access Syntax aaa port access authenticator e lt port list gt con
90. the order in which their IP addresses were configured in the switch Use show radius to view the order As long as the first server is accessible and responding to authentication requests from the switch a second or third server will not be accessed For more on this topic refer to Changing RADIUS Server Access Order on page 5 30 If access to a RADIUS server fails during a session but after the client has been authenticated the switch continues to assume the server is available to receive accounting data Thus if server access fails during a session it will not receive accounting data transmitted from the switch Steps for Configuring RADIUS Accounting l Configure the switch for accessing a RADIUS server You can configure a list of up to three RADIUS servers one primary two backup The switch operates on the assumption that a server can operate in both accounting and authentication mode Refer to the documentation for your RADIUS server application Use the same radius server host command that you would use to configure RADIUS authentication Refer to 2 Configure the Switch To Access a RADIUS Server on page 5 10 Provide the following A RADIUS server IP address Optional a UDP destination port for authentication requests Otherwise the switch assigns the default UDP port 1812 recom mended RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Configuring RADIUS Accounting Optional if you are
91. this address becomes first in the list 4 Re enter 10 10 10 001 Because the only position open is the third position this address becomes last in the list ProCurve config no radius host 10 10 003 Removes the 003 and 001 addresses from ProCurve config no radius host 10 10 001 the RADIUS server list ProCurve config radius host 10 10 10 003 ProCurve config radius host 10 10 10 001 Inserts the 003 address in the first position in the RADIUS server list and inserts the 001 ProCurve config show radius address in the last position in the list Status and Counters General RADIUS Information Deadtime min O Timeout secs 5 Retransmit Attempts Global Encryption Key Auth Acct Server IP Addr Port Port Encryption Key 10 10 10 3 1812 1613 Shows the new order in which the switch 10 10 10 2 esr Es O OOTOCOCOCOCSC searches for a RADIUS server 10 10 10 1 1612 1813 Figure 5 18 Example of New RADIUS Server Search Order 5 31 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Messages Related to RADIUS Operation Messages Related to RADIUS Operation Message Meaning Can t reach RADIUS server lt X X X X gt A designated RADIUS server is not responding to an authentication request Try pinging the server to determine whether it is accessible to the switch If the server is accessible then verify that the switch is using the correct encryption key and thatthe se
92. this guide include Local Manager and Operator Passwords page 2 1 Control access and privileges for the CLI menu and web browser interfaces m TACACS Authentication page 4 1 Uses an authentication appli cation on a server to allow or deny access to a switch RADIUS Authentication and Accounting page 5 1 Like TACACS uses an authentication application on a central server to allow or deny access to the switch RADIUS also provides accounting services for sending data about user activity and system events to a RADIUS server Secure Shell SSH Authentication page 6 1 Provides encrypted paths for remote access to switch management functions Secure Socket Layer SSL page 7 1 Provides remote web access to the switch via encrypted authentication paths between the switch and management station clients capable of SSL TLS operation 1 2 Note Getting Started Overview of Access Security Features Port Based Access Control 802 1X page 8 1 On point to point connections enables the switch to allow or deny traffic between a port and an 802 1X aware device supplicant attempting to access the switch Also enables the switch to operate as a supplicant for connections to other 802 1X aware switches Port Security page 9 1 Enables a switch port to maintain a unique list of MAC addresses defining which specific devices are allowed to access the network through that port Also enables a port to detect
93. timeout lt 1 15 gt Specifies the maximum time the switch waits for a response to an authentication request before counting the attempt as a failure Default 3 seconds Range 1 15 seconds radius server retransmit lt 1 5 gt If a RADIUS server fails to respond to an authentica tion request specifies how many retries to attempt before closing the session Default 3 Range 1 5 Where the switch has multiple RADIUS servers configured to support authen tication requests if the first server fails to respond then the switch tries the next server in the list and so on If none of the servers respond then the switch attempts to use the secondary authentication method configured for the type of access being attempted console Telnet or SSH If this occurs refer to RADIUS Related Problems in the Troubleshooting chapter of the Manage ment and Configuration Guide for your switch 5 13 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Configuring the Switch for RADIUS Authentication For example suppose that your switch is configured to use three RADIUS servers for authenticating access through Telnet and SSH Two of these servers use the same encryption key In this case your plan is to configure the switch with the following global authentication parameters Allow only two tries to correctly enter username and password Use the global encryption key to support the two servers that use the same key For this example
94. to operate as a supplicant when connected to a port on another switch running 802 1X authentication Switch Running 802 1X and A Operating as an Authenticator 802 1X Aware Client Supplicant Va LAN Core Switch Running 802 1X and RADIUS Server Connected as a Supplicant Figure 8 1 Example of an 802 1X Application Accounting The switch also provides RADIUS Network accounting for 802 1X access Refer to RADIUS Authentication and Accounting on page 5 1 8 6 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Terminology Terminology 802 1X Aware Refers to a device that is running either 802 1X authenticator software or 802 1X client software and is capable of interacting with other devices on the basis of the IEEE 802 1X standard Authorized Client VLAN Like the Unauthorized Client VLAN this is a conventional static VLAN previously configured on the switch by the System Administrator The intent in using this VLAN is to provide authen ticated clients with network services that are not available on either the port s statically configured VLAN memberships or any VLAN member ships that may be assigned during the RADIUS authentication process While an 802 1X port is a member of this VLAN the port is untagged When a port loses its authenticated client connection it drops its membership in this VLAN Note that with multiple clients on a port all such clients use the same un
95. to the documentation you received with the application CLI Message Connecting to Tacacs server Connecting to secondary Tacacs server Invalid password No Tacacs servers responding Not legal combination of authentication methods Record already exists Meaning The switch is attempting to contact the TACACS server identified in the switch s tacacs server configuration as the first choice or only TACACS server The switch was not able to contact the first choice TACACS server and is now attempting to contact the next secondary TACACS server identified in the switch s tacacs server configuration The system does not recognize the username or the password or both Depending on the authentication method tacacs or local either the TACACS server application did not recognize the username password pair or the username password pair did not match the username password pair configured in the switch The switch has not been able to contact any designated TACACS servers If this message is followed by the Username prompt the switch is attempting local authentication For console access if you select tacacs as the primary authentication method you must selectlocal as the secondary authentication method This prevents you from being locked out of the switch if all designated TACACS servers are inaccessible to the switch When resulting from a tacacs server host lt ip addr gt command indicates an attempt to e
96. 0 Show Commands for Port Access Supplicant How RADIUS 802 1X Authentication Affects VLAN Operation Messages Related to 802 1X Operation 00 0200 cee eee ee 9 10 Configuring and Monitoring Port Security CONLENIUS ceive er a TEE aa a EREE a N Pads ware Magalies 9 1 OVEEVIEW itu e hai vie eat AEE a A Fab e Saheb ote E 9 2 Basic Operations meueroiserne netee e iene eek eh eee SG OS 9 2 Blocking Unauthorized Traffic 00 0 c eee eee eee eee 9 3 Trunk Group Exclusion 00 00 c eee eee eee eee ae 9 4 Planning Port Security 0 cece cece eee ees 9 5 Port Security Command Options and Operation 9 6 Retention of Static MAC Addresses 000 eee eee eee 9 10 Displaying Current Port Security Settings 9 10 Configuring Port Security 00 c cece eee ee eee 9 12 Web Displaying and Configuring Port Security Features 9 17 Reading Intrusion Alerts and Resetting Alert Flags 9 17 Notice of Security Violations 00 cece eee eee nee 9 17 How the Intrusion Log Operates 0 0 002 cece eee 9 18 Keeping the Intrusion Log Current by Resetting Alert Flags 9 19 Using the Event Log To Find Intrusion Alerts 9 24 Web Checking for Intrusions Listing Intrusion Alerts and Resetting Alert Flags 00 cece eee eee eee ees 9 25
97. 0 0000 4 25 Operating Notes 5 00 csc50 nerea 644 be pia REDE EN CEE EE pea EE ee ES 4 25 5 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting CONTENTS Fic ake aad bed a as 28 OS ae lh dae ees 5 1 OV ETVIC Wii hh ais Mol 8 ES std rea ke Sete E E eialie unains ote E 5 2 Terminology state oes hea ek aes hi eae Sa CEA 5 3 Switch Operating Rules for RADIUS 0 0 0 cece eee 5 4 General RADIUS Setup Procedure 2 0 cece eee eee eee 5 5 Configuring the Switch for RADIUS Authentication 5 6 Outline of the Steps for Configuring RADIUS Authentication 5 7 1 Configure Authentication for the Access Methods You Want RADIUS To Protect 00 cece eee eee 5 8 2 Configure the Switch To Access a RADIUS Server 5 10 3 Configure the Switch s Global RADIUS Parameters 5 12 Local Authentication Process 0 0 cece eee eee eee 5 16 Controlling Web Browser Interface Access When Using RADIUS Authentication oner rrna ea net EE EE ae we oS alone deanna oes 5 17 Configuring RADIUS Accounting nsanra eee eee 5 17 Operating Rules for RADIUS Accounting 004 5 19 Steps for Configuring RADIUS Accounting 5 19 Viewing RADIUS Statistics 0 0 cece 5 25 General RADIUS Statistics 2 0 0 000k 5 25 RADIUS Authentication Statistics 0 00 0 cee eee eee ee 5 28 RADIUS Accounting Statistics 000 5 29 Changi
98. 02 1X Supplicant Commands no aaa port access lt supplicant gt ethernet lt port list gt page 8 44 auth timeout held period start period max start initialize page 8 44 identity secret clear statistics 802 1X Related Show Commands page 8 47 RADIUS server configuration pages 8 24 You can configure a switch port to operate as a supplicant in a connection to a port on another 802 1X aware switch to provide security on links between 802 1X aware switches A port can operate as both an authenticator and a supplicant Example Suppose that you want to connect two switches where 8 42 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Configuring Switch Ports To Operate As Supplicants for 802 1X Connections to Other Switches Switch A has port Al configured for 802 1X supplicant operation You want to connect port Al on switch A to port B5 on switch B Switch B yo Port BS SORE MOREN Port A1 Py Switch A Port A1 Configured as an f 802 1X Supplicant Z RADIUS Server Figure 8 6 Example of Supplicant Operation 1 When port Al on switch A is first connected to a port on switch B or if the ports are already connected and either switch reboots port Al begins sending start packets to port B5 on switch B e If after the supplicant port sends the configured number of start request
99. 4 No server s responding This message can appear if you configured the switch for EAP RADIUS or CHAP RADIUS authentication but the switch does not receive a response from a RADIUS server Ensure that the switch is configured to access at least one RADIUS server Use show radius If you also see the message Can t reach RADIUS server lt x xX x x gt try the suggestions listed for that message page 5 32 LACP has been disabled on 802 1X port s Error configuring port lt port number gt LACP and 802 1X cannot be run together To maintain security LACP is not allowed on ports configured for 802 1X authenticator operation If you configure port security on a port on which LACP active or passive is configured the switch removes the LACP configuration displays a notice that LACP is disabled on the port s and enables 802 1X on that port Also the switch will not allow you to configure LACP on a port on which port access 802 1X is enabled 8 58 Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Contents QV EL VICW io2b ccc sede steven tents ai eer saan tba lng asd cae E E od nce Per anga tear 9 2 Basic OperatOns 3 2 444 die hoon nne h a E ee aed SEES 24 9 2 Blocking Unauthorized Traffic 0 cece eee eee eee 9 3 Trunk Group Exclusion 00 00 c eee eee eee eee eee 9 4 Planning Port Security 0 c ccc cece eee eens 9 5 Port Security Command Options and Operation
100. AN For example suppose you want to configure 802 1X port access with Open VLAN mode on ports A10 A20 and m These two static VLANs already exist on the switch e Unauthorized VID 80 e Authorized VID 81 m Your RADIUS server has an IP address of 10 28 127 101 The server uses rad4all as a server specific key string The server is connected to a port on the Default VLAN m The switch s default VLAN is already configured with an IP address of 10 28 127 100 and a network mask of 255 255 255 0 ProCurve config aaa authentication port access eap radius Configures the switch for 802 1X authentication using an EAP RADIUS server ProCurve config aaa port access authenticator al0 a20 Configures ports A10 A20 as 802 1 authenticator ports ProCurve config radius host 10 28 127 101 key rad4all Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X 802 1X Open VLAN Mode Configures the switch to look fora RADIUS server with an IP address of 10 28 127 101 and an encryption key of rad4all ProCurve config aaa port access authenticator e al0 a20 unauth vid 80 Configures ports A10 A20 to use VLAN 80 as the Unauthorized Client VLAN ProCurve config aaa port access authenticator e al0 a20 auth vid 81 Configures ports A10 A20 to use VLAN 81 as the Authorized Client VLAN ProCurve config aaa port access authenticator active Activates 802 1X port access on ports you have configured as authentica
101. ANs then you do not need to configure VLAN assignments in your RADIUS server or consider using either Authorized or Unauthorized VLANs If your LAN does use multiple VLANs then some of the following factors may apply to your use of Web Auth and MAC Auth e Web Auth and MAC Auth operate only with port based VLANs Oper ation with protocol VLANs is not supported and clients do not have access to protocol VLANs during Web Auth and MAC Auth sessions e A port can belong to one untagged VLAN during any client session Where multiple authenticated clients may simultaneously use the same port they must all be capable of operating on the same VLAN e During an authenticated client session the following hierarchy deter mines a port s VLAN membership 1 Ifthere is a RADIUS assigned VLAN then for the duration of the client session the port belongs to this VLAN and temporarily drops all other VLAN memberships 3 10 Web and MAC Authentication Operating Rules and Notes 2 Ifthere is no RADIUS assigned VLAN then for the duration of the client session the port belongs to the Authorized VLAN if configured and temporarily drops all other VLAN memberships 3 Ifneither 1 or 2 above apply but the port is an untagged member of astatically configured port based VLAN then the port remains in this VLAN 4 Ifneither 1 2 or 3 above apply then the client session does not have access to any statically configured untagged VLANs and
102. Alerts and Resetting Alert Flags 1 Check the Alert Log by clicking on the Status tab and the Overview button If there is a Security Violation entry do the following Click on the Security tab b Click on Intrusion Log Ports with Intrusion Flag indicates any ports for which the alert flag has not been cleared c To clear the current alert flags click on Reset Alert Flags To access the web based Help provided for the switch click on in the web browser screen Operating Notes for Port Security Identifying the IP Address of an Intruder The Intrusion Log lists detected intruders by MAC address Proxy Web Servers If you are using the switch s web browser interface through a switch port configured for Static port security and your browser access is through a proxy web server then it is necessary to do the following Enter your PC or workstation MAC address in the port s Authorized Addresses list Enter your PC or workstation s IP address in the switch s IP Autho rized Managers list See chapter 10 Using Authorized IP Managers Without both of the above configured the switch detects only the proxy server s MAC address and not your PC or workstation MAC address and interprets your connection as unauthorized Prior To Entries in the Intrusion Log Ifyou reset the switch using the Reset button Device Reset or Reboot Switch the Intrusion Log will list the time of all cur
103. Allows client moves between the specified ports under Web Auth control When enabled the switch allows clients to move without requiring a re authentication When disabled the switch does not allow moves and when one does occur the user will be forced to re authenticate At least two ports from port s and to port s must be specified Use the no form of the command to disable client moves between ports under Web Auth control Default disabled no moves allowed 3 19 Web and MAC Authentication Configuring Web Authentication Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax aaa port access web based e lt port list gt logoff period lt 60 9999999 gt Specifies the period in seconds that the switch enforces for an implicit logoff This parameter is equivalent to the MAC age interval in a traditional switch sense If the switch does not see activity after a logoff period interval the client is returned to its pre authentication state Default 300 seconds aaa port access web based e lt port list gt max requests lt 1 10 gt Specifies the number of authentication attempts that must time out before authentication fails Default 2 aaa port access web based e lt port list gt max retries lt 1 10 gt Specifies the number of the number of times a client can enter their user name and password before authen tication fails This allows the reentry of the user name and password if n
104. Any port VLAN ID changes you make on 802 1 X aware ports during an 802 1X authenticated session do not take effect until the session ends With GVRP enabled a temporary untagged static VLAN assignment created on a port by 802 1X authentication is advertised as an existing VLAN If this temporary VLAN assignment causes the switch to disable a configured untagged static VLAN assignment on the port then the disabled VLAN assignment is not advertised When the 802 1X session ends the switch Eliminates and ceases to advertise the temporary VLAN assignment m Re activates and resumes advertising the temporarily disabled VLAN assignment 8 57 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Messages Related to 802 1X Operation Messages Related to 802 1X Operation Table 8 4 802 1X Operating Messages Message Meaning Port lt port list gt is not an authenticator The ports in the port list have not been enabled as 802 1X authenticators Use this command to enable the ports as authenticators ProCurve config aaa port access authenticator e 10 Port lt port list gt is nota supplicant Occurs when there is an attempt to change the supplicant configuration on a port that is not currently enabled as a supplicant Enable the port as a supplicant and then make the desired supplicant configuration changes Refer to Enabling a Switch Port To Operate as a Supplicant on page 8 4
105. DIUS server then analyzes the response and sends either a suc cess or failure packet back through switch B to port A1 e A success response unblocks port B5 to normal traffic from port A1 e A failure response continues the block on port B5 and causes port A1 to wait for the held time period before trying again to achieve authentication through port B5 You can configure a switch port to operate as both a supplicant and an authenticator at the same time General Operating Rules and Notes m Inthe client based mode when there is an authenticated client on a port the following traffic movement is allowed e Multicast and broadcast traffic is allowed on the port e Unicast traffic to authenticated clients on the port is allowed e All traffic from authenticated clients on the port is allowed m When a port on the switch is configured as either an authenticator or supplicant and is connected to another device rebooting the switch causes a re authentication of the link m Using client based 802 1X authentication when a port on the switch is configured as an authenticator the port allows only authenticated clients up to the currently configured client limit For clients that do not have the proper 802 1X supplicant software the optional 802 1X Open VLAN mode can be used to open a path for down loading 802 1X supplicant software to a client or to provide other services for unauthenticated clients
106. E01 E39E D49C 2575 aaau MD5 200B 30E6 E080 38C3 Department Name CE94 BFD8 86F8 1887 gt E SHA BE24 F173 55D4 BEOA City 4E05 2C40 Apply Changes Clear Changes Figure 7 6 Web browser Interface showing current SSL Host Certificate Generate a CA Signed server host certificate with the Web Browser Interface This section describes how to install a CA Signed server host certificate from the web browser interface For more information on how to access the web browser interface refer to the chapter titled Using the Web Browser Inter face in the Management and Configuration Guide for your switch The installation of a CA signed certificate involves interaction with other entities and consists of three phases The first phase is the creation of the CA certificate request which is then copied off from the switch for submission to the certificate authority The second phase is the actual submission process 7 15 Configuring Secure Socket Layer SSL General Operating Rules and Notes that involves having the certificate authority verify the certificate request and then digitally signing the request to generate a certificate response the usable server host certificate The third phase is the download phase consisting of pasting to the switch web server the certificate response which is then validated by the switch and put into use by enabling SSL To generate a certificate request from the web browser interface
107. H Access for Password Only SSH Authentication When configured with this option the switch uses its pub lic key to authenticate itself to a client but uses only passwords for client authentication 6 18 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Configuring the Switch for SSH Operation Syntax aaa authentication ssh login lt local tacacs radius gt lt local none gt Configures a password method for the primary and second ary login Operator access If you do not specify an optional secondary method it defaults to none If the primary pass word method is local you cannot use local for the secondary password method aaa authentication ssh enable lt local tacacs radius gt lt local none gt Configures a password method for the primary and second ary enable Manager access If you do not specify an optional secondary method it defaults to none Ifthe primary password method is local you cannot use local for the sec ondary password method Option B Configuring the Switch for Client Public Key SSH Authentication If configured with this option the switch uses its public key to authenticate itself to a client but the client must also provide a client public key for the switch to authenticate This option requires the additional step of copying a client public key file from a TFTP server into the switch This means that before you can use this option you must 1 Create a key pair on an SSH client 2 Copy the cl
108. I RSA only 3072 bits 1024 characters Comments See figure 6 8 on page 6 13 The key must be one unbroken ASCII string If you add more than one client public key to a file terminate each key except the last one with a lt CR gt lt LF gt Spaces are allowed within the key to delimit the key s components Note that unlike the use of the switch s public key in an SSH client application the format of a client public key used by the switch does not include the client s IP address Shorter key lengths allow faster operation but also mean diminished security Includes the bit size public index modulus any comments lt CR gt lt LF gt and all blank spaces If necessary you can use an editor application to verify the size of a key For example placing a client public key into a Word for Windows text file and clicking on File Properties Statistics lets you view the number of characters in the file including spaces 2 Copy the client s public key into a text file filename txt For example you can use the Notepad editor included with the Microsoft Windows software If you want several clients to use client public key authentica tion copy a public key for each of these clients up to ten into the file Each key should be separated from the preceding key by a lt CR gt lt LF gt 3 Copy the client public key file into a TFTP server accessible to the switch 6 25 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Furt
109. In this case a ProCurve switch configured for RADIUS security operation RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS Client The device that passes user information to designated RADIUS servers RADIUS Host See RADIUS server RADIUS Server A server running the RADIUS application you are using on your network This server receives user connection requests from the switch authenticates users and then returns all necessary information to the switch For the ProCurve switch a RADIUS server can also perform accounting functions Sometimes termed a RADIUS host Shared Secret Key A text value used for encrypting datain RADIUS packets Both the RADIUS client and the RADIUS server have a copy of the key and the key is never transmitted across the network 5 3 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Switch Operating Rules for RADIUS Switch Operating Rules for RADIUS You must have at least one RADIUS server accessible to the switch m The switch supports authentication and accounting using up to three RADIUS servers The switch accesses the servers in the order in which they are listed by show radius page 5 25 If the first server does not respond the switch tries the next one and so on To change the order in which the switch accesses RADIUS servers refer to Changing RADIUS Server Access Order on page 5 80 m Youcanselect RADIUS as the primary authentication method for each type of access Only o
110. Password You will then be prompted with Enter new password b Type a password of up to 16 ASCII characters with no spaces and press Enter Remember that passwords are case sensitive c When prompted with Enter new password again retype the new pass word and press Enter After you configure a password if you subsequently start a new console session you will be prompted to enter the password If you use the CLI or web browser interface to configure an optional username the switch will prompt you for the username and then the password To Delete Password Protection Including Recovery from a Lost Password This procedure deletes all usernames if configured and pass words Manager and Operator 2 4 Configuring Username and Password Security Configuring Local Password Security If you have physical access to the switch press and hold the Clear button on the front of the switch for a minimum of one second to clear all password protection then enter new passwords as described earlier in this chapter If you do not have physical access to the switch you will need Manager Level access 1 Enter the console at the Manager level 2 Go to the Set Passwords screen as described above 3 Select Delete Password Protection You will then see the following prompt Continue Deletion of password protection No 4 Press the Space bar to select Yes then press Enter 5 Press Enter to clear the Password Protection m
111. ProCurve Networking by HP Access Security Guide ProCurve Switches Q 11 XX 2510 24 U 11 XX 2510 48 www procurve com CA invent ProCurve Series 2510 Switches January 2008 Access Security Guide Copyright 2008 Hewlett Packard Company L P The information contained herein is subject to change without notice Publication Number 5991 4763 January 2008 Applicable Products ProCurve Switch 2510 24 J9019B ProCurve Switch 2510 48 J9020A Trademark Credits Windows NT Windows and MS Windows are US registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Software Credits SSH on ProCurve Switches is based on the OpenSSH software toolkit This product includes software developed by the OpenSSH Project for use in the OpenSSH Toolkit For more information on OpenSSH visit www openssh com SSLon ProCurve Switches is based on the OpenSSLsoftware toolkit This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit For more information on OpenSSL visit www openssLorg This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Disclaimer HEWLETT PACKARD COMPANY MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Hewlett Packard shall not be liable
112. RADIUS Yes No Yes local or none Manager ssh enable local Yes No Yes none Enable ssh enable tacacs Yes No Yes local or none Level ssh enable radius Yes No Yes local or none 1 For ssh login public key the switch uses client public key authentication instead of the switch password options for primary authentication The general steps for configuring SSH include A Client Preparation 1 Install an SSH client application on a management station you want to use for access to the switch Refer to the documentation provided with your SSH client application 2 Optional If you want the switch to authenticate a client public key on the client a Either generate a public private key pair on the client computer Gf your client application allows or import a client key pair that you have generated using another SSH application b Copy the client public key into an ASCII file on a TFTP server accessible to the switch and download the client public key file to the switch The client public key file can hold up to ten client keys This topic is covered under To Create a Client Public Key Text File on page 6 24 6 6 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Steps for Configuring and Using SSH for Switch and Client Authentication B Switch Preparation 1 Assign a login Operator and enable Manager password on the switch page 6 9 Generate a public private key pair on the switch page 6 10 You need to do this only on
113. Refer to 802 1X Open VLAN Mode on page 8 26 logoff period lt 1 999999999 gt Configures the period of time the switch waits for client activity before removing an inactive client from the port Default 300 seconds auth vid lt vid gt Configures an existing static VLAN to be the Autho rized Client VLAN Refer to S02 1X Open VLAN Mode on page 8 26 initialize On the specified ports blocks inbound and outbound traffic and restarts the 802 1X authentication process This happens only on ports configured with control auto and actively operating as 802 1X authenticators Note If a specified port is configured with control authorized and port security and the port has learned an authorized address the port will remove this address and learn a new one from the first packet it receives reauthenticate Forces reauthentication unless the authenticator is in HELD state clear statistics Clears authenticator statistics counters 8 22 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Configuring Switch Ports as 802 1X Authenticators 3 Configure the 802 1X Authentication Method This task specifies how the switch will authenticate the credentials provided by asupplicant connected to a switch port configured as an 802 1X authenti cator Syntax aaa authentication port access lt local eap radius chap radius gt Determines the type of RADIUS authentication to use
114. Response The port automatically blocks a client that cannot initiate an authentication session Open VLAN mode with both of the following configured Unauthorized Client VLAN Authorized Client VLAN When the port detects a client it automatically becomes an untagged member of this VLAN If you previously configured the port as a static tagged member of the VLAN membership temporarily changes to untagged while the client remains unauthenticated If the port already has a statically configured untagged membership in another VLAN then the port temporarily closes access to this other VLAN while in the Unauthorized Client VLAN To limit security risks the network services and access available onthe Unauthorized Client VLAN should include only whata client needs to enable an authentication session If the portis statically configured as a tagged member of any other VLANs access to these VLANs is blocked while the port is a member of the Unauthorized Client VLAN After the client is authenticated the port drops membership inthe Unauthorized Client VLAN and becomes an untagged member of this VLAN Note if RADIUS authentication assigns a VLAN the port temporarily becomes a member of the RADIUS assigned VLAN instead of the Authorized Client VLAN while the client is connected If the portis statically configured as a tagged member of a VLAN and this VLAN is used as the Authorized Client VLAN then the port temporarily b
115. S software packages available A switch configured for TACACS authentication with access to one or more TACACS servers The effectiveness of TACACS security depends on correctly using your TACACS server application For this reason ProCurve recommends that you thoroughly test all TACACS configurations used in your network TACACS aware ProCurve switches include the capability of configuring multiple backup TACACS servers ProCurve recommends that you use a TACACS server application that supports a redundant backup installation This allows you to configure the switch to use a backup TACACS server if it loses access to the first choice TACACS server TACACS does not affect web browser interface access Refer to Controlling Web Browser Interface Access When Using TACACS Authentication on page 4 24 General Authentication Setup Procedure It is important to test the TACACS service before fully implementing it Depending on the process and parameter settings you use to set up and test TACACS authentication in your network you could accidentally lock all users including yourself out of access to a switch While recovery is simple it may pose an inconvenience that can be avoided To prevent an unintentional lockout on a switch use a procedure that configures and tests TACACS protection for one access type for example Telnet access while keeping the 4 5 TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Swit
116. S server configure the client device authentication in the same way that you would any other client except m Configure the client device s hexadecimal MAC address as both username and password Be careful to configure the switch to use the same format that the RADIUS server uses Otherwise the server will deny access The switch provides four format options aabbccddeeff the default format aabbcc ddeeff aa bb cc dd ee ff aa bb ce dd ee ff Note on MAC Letters in MAC addresses must be in lowercase Addresses m Ifthe device is a switch or other VLAN capable device use the base MAC address assigned to the device and not the MAC address assigned to the VLAN through which the device communicates with the authenticator switch Note that each switch covered by this guide applies a single MAC address to all VLANs configured in the switch Thus for a given switch the MAC address is the same for all VLANs configured on the switch Refer to the chapter titled Static Virtual LANs VLANs in the Advanced Traffic Management Guide for your switch 3 14 Web and MAC Authentication Configuring the Switch To Access a RADIUS Server Configuring the Switch To Access a RADIUS Server RADIUS Server Configuration Commands radius server host lt ip address gt below key lt global key string gt below radius server host lt p address gt key lt server specific key string gt 3 16 This section describes the mini
117. Start Month Day Year x Common Name ate m a a E i Certificate Arguments Validity End a Month Day Year J Organization Unit 10255 255p Coes State Country Fingerprint MD5 _ Company Name Department Name l l l l SHA l Citv Apply Changes Clear Changes Figure 7 5 Self Signed Certificate generation via SSL Web Browser Interface Screen To view the current host certificate in the web browser interface 1 Proceed to the Security tab 2 Then the SSL button 7 14 77 curing Secure Socket Layer SSL Current SSL Host Certificate neral Operating Rules and Notes roCurve Networking m Status mation a AA wPinnovaion ProCu n 2510 24 idenity Status Gonnguration Security Diagnostics Suppor SSL Settings Current SSL Host Certificate SSL Enable Off v Port 443 ra Use Installed Certificate Installed Certificate i Fran te Self Signed Certificate Type Self Signed RSA Key Size 512 bits ne 7 Validity Start RSA Key Size 512 xij Date 1 1 2002 i 7 i Validity End Certificate Information Fields Date Common Name Organization Name lf Month Day Year x oo ProCurve Network 10 255 255 w pea Create Certificate Certificate Request 1 1 2003 10 255 255 255 Month Day Year x Hewlett Packard Company Name Country Us Fingerprint B
118. The client public key file remains in the switch s flash memory even if you erase the startup config file reset the switch or reboot the switch m You can remove the existing client public key file or specific keys by executing the clear crypto public key command Syntax clear crypto client public key Deletes the client public key file from the switch Syntax clear crypto client public key 3 Deletes the entry with an index of 3 from the client public key file on the switch Enabling Client Public Key Authentication After you TFTP a client public key file into the switch described above you can configure the switch to allow one of the following m Ifan SSH client s public key matches the switch s client public key file allow that client access to the switch If there is not a public key match then deny access to that client m Ifan SSH client s public key does not have a match in the switch s client public key file allow the client access if the user can enter the switch s login Operator password If the switch does not have an Operator password then deny access to that client 6 27 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Further Information on SSH Client Public Key Authentication Caution Syntax aaa authentication ssh login public key none Allows SSH client access only if the switch detects a match between the client s public key and an entry in the client public key file most recently copied into the sw
119. To Access a RADIUS Server This section describes how to configure the switch to interact with a RADIUS server for both authentication and accounting services If you want to configure RADIUS accounting on the switch go to page 5 17 Configuring RADIUS Accounting instead of continuing here Syntax no radius server host lt ip address gt Adds a server to the RADIUS configuration or with no deletes a server from the configuration You can configure up to three RADIUS server addresses The switch uses the first server it successfully accesses Refer to Changing the RADIUS Server Access Order on page 5 30 auth port lt port number gt Optional Changes the UDP destination port for authenti cation requests to the specified RADIUS server host If you do not use this option with the radius server host command the switch automatically assigns the default authentication port number The auth port number must match its server counterpart Default 1812 acct port lt port number gt Optional Changes the UDP destination port for account ing requests to the specified RADIUS server If you do not use this option with the radius server host command the switch automatically assigns the default accounting port number The acct port number must match its server coun terpart Default 1813 key lt key string gt Optional Specifies an encryption key for use during authentication or accounting session
120. Use the username password pair configured locally in the switch for the privilege level being configured tacacs Use a TACACS server local none n a Specifies the secondary backup type of authentication being configured or local The username password pair configured locally in the switch for the none privilege level being configured none No secondary type of authentication for the specified method privilege path Available only if the primary method of authentication for the access being configured is local Note If you do not specify this parameter in the command line the switch automatically assigns the secondary method as follows e Ifthe primary method is tacacs the only secondary method is local e Ifthe primary method is local the default secondary method is none num attempts 3 1 10 In a given session specifies how many tries at entering the correct username password pair are allowed before access is denied and the session terminated As shown in the next table login and enable access is always available locally through a direct terminal connection to the switch s console port However for Telnet access you can configure TACACS to deny access if a TACACS server goes down or otherwise becomes unavailable to the switch TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Switch Table 4 2 Primary Secondary Authentication Table Access Method and Authentication Options Effect on A
121. VLAN Information Ports VLAN 1 602 10 VLAN ID 1 Name DEFAULT_VLAN Status Static Port Information Mode Unknown VLAN Status Untagged Untagged Untagged i Untagged Note that ports B1 and B3 are 152 Untagged not in the upper listing but are 154 included under Overridden 7 Port VLAN configuration This shows that static untagged VLAN memberships on ports B1 and B3 have been overridden B23 Untagged by temporary assignmentto the B24 Untagged Learn authorized or unauthorized VLAN Using the show port access authenticator lt port list gt command shown in figure 8 8 provides details Tagged x BS Untagged Overridden Port VLAN configuration Port Mode Untagged Untagged Figure 8 9 Example of Showing a VLAN with Ports Configured for Open VLAN Mode 8 52 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Displaying 802 1X Configuration Statistics and Counters Show Commands for Port Access Supplicant Syntax show port access supplicant e lt port list gt statistics show port access supplicant e lt port list gt Shows the port access supplicant configuration excluding the secret parameter for all ports or lt port list gt ports configured on the switch as supplicants The Supplicant State can include the following Connecting Starting authentication Authenticated Authentication completed regardless of whether the attempt was successful Acquir
122. Web Authentication on a switch Refer to aaa port access web based e lt port list gt redirect url lt url gt on page 3 21 Static VLAN A VLAN that has been configured as permanent on the switch by using the CLI vlan lt vid gt command or the Menu interface Unauthorized Client VLAN A conventional static untagged port based VLAN previously configured on the switch by the System Administrator It is used to provide limited network access and services to clients who are not authenticated 3 9 Web and MAC Authentication Operating Rules and Notes Note on Port Access Management Operating Rules and Notes You can configure one type of authentication on a port That is the following authentication types are mutually exclusive on a given port e Web Authentication e MAC Authentication e 802 1X m Order of Precedence for Port Access Management highest to lowest e MAC lockout e MAC lockdown or Port Security e Port based Access Control 802 1X or Web Authentication or MAC Authentication When configuring a port for Web or MAC Authentication be sure that a higher precedent port access management feature is not enabled on the port For example be sure that Port Security is disabled on a port before configuring it for Web or MAC Authentication If Port Security is enabled on the port this misconfiguration does not allow Web or MAC Authentication to occur m VLANs If your LAN does not use multiple VL
123. accessible for viewing or copying A private key generated by an SSH client applica tion is typically stored in a file on the client device and together with its public key counterpart can be copied and stored on multiple devices m Public Key An internally generated counterpart to a private key A device s public key is used to authenticate the device to other devices m Enable Level Manager privileges on the switch Login Level Operator privileges on the switch Local password or username A Manager level or Operator level password configured in the switch m SSH Enabled 1 A public private key pair has been generated on the switch crypto key generate ssh rsa and 2 SSH is enabled ip ssh You can generate a key pair without enabling SSH but you cannot enable SSH without first generating a key pair See 2 Generate the Switch s Public and Private Key Pair on page 6 10 and 4 Enable SSH on the Switch and Anticipate SSH Client Contact Behavior on page 6 15 6 4 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Prerequisite for Using SSH Prerequisite for Using SSH Before using the switch as an SSH server you must install a publicly or commercially available SSH client application on the computer s you use for management access to the switch If you want client public key authentication page 6 2 then the client program must have the capability to generate or import keys Public Key Formats Any client app
124. address that is no longer authorized you should first reduce the Address Limit address limit integer by 1 as shown in the next example This prevents the possibility of the same device or another device on the network from automatically being accepted as authorized for that port You can prevent the port from learning unauthorized MAC addresses by using the learn mode configured option instead of the learn mode static option Refer to the Note on page 9 6 To remove a device MAC address from the Authorized list and when the current number of devices equals the Address Limit value you should first reduce the Address Limit value by 1 then remove the unwanted device When you have configured the switch for learn mode static operation you can reduce the address limit below the number of currently authorized addresses on a port This enables you to subsequently remove a device from the Autho rized list without opening the possibility for an unwanted device to automat ically become authorized If you use learn mode configured instead the switch cannot automatically add detected devices not included in the mac address configuration Refer to the Note on page 9 6 For example suppose port Al is configured as shown below and you want to remove 0c0090 123456 from the Authorized Address list ProCurve config show port security 1 Port Security Port 1 Learn Mode Continuous Static Address Limit 1 Action None
125. agement and no telnet If you need to increase SNMP security you should use SNMP version 3 only If you need to increase the security of your web interface refer to chapter 7 Configuring Secure Socket Layer SSL Another security measure is to use the Authorized IP Managers feature described in the switch s Management and Configuration Guide To protect against unauthorized access to the serial port and the Clear button which removes local password protection keep physical access to the switch restricted to authorized personnel 5 Configure the Switch for SSH Authentication Note that all methods in this section result in authentication of the switch s public key by an SSH client However only Option B page 6 19 results in the switch also authenticating the client s public key Also for a more detailed discussion of the topics in this section refer to Further Information on SSH Client Public Key Authentication on page 6 23 ProCurve recommends that you always assign a Manager Level enable password to the switch Without this level of protection any user with Telnet web or serial port access to the switch can change the switch s configuration Also if you configure only an Operator password entering the Operator password through telnet web SSH or serial port access enables full manager privileges See 1 Assign Local Login Operator and Enable Manager Password on page 6 9 Option A Configuring SS
126. and allows switch access only to a station having an IP address that is identical to the Authorized Manager IP parameter value 255 in an octet of the mask means that only the exact value in the corresponding octet of the Authorized Manager IP parameter is allowed in the IP address of an authorized management station However you can alter the mask and the Authorized Manager IP parameter to specify ranges of authorized IP addresses For example a mask of 255 255 255 0 and any value for the Authorized Manager IP parameter allows a range of 0 through 255 in the 4th octet of the authorized IP address which enables a block of up to 254 IP addresses for IP management access excluding 0 for the network and 255 for broadcasts A mask of 10 4 Note Using Authorized IP Managers Defining Authorized Management Stations 255 255 255 252 uses the 4th octet of a given Authorized Manager IP address to authorize four IP addresses for management station access The details on how to use IP masks are provided under Building IP Masks on page 10 9 The IP Mask is a method for recognizing whether a given IP address is authorized for management access to the switch This mask serves a different purpose than IP subnet masks and is applied in a different manner Menu Viewing and Configuring IP Authorized Managers From the console Main Menu select 2 Switch Configuration 7 IP Authorized Managers Switch Configuration IP Mana
127. and username if assigned from the switch you would do the following ProCurve config no password Password protection will be deleted do you want to continue y n y ProCurve config Press Y for yes and press Enter ees Figure 2 3 Removing a Password and Associated Username from the Switch The effect of executing the command in figure 2 3 is to remove password protection from the Operator level This means that anyone who can access the switch console can gain Operator access without having to enter a user name or password Web Setting Passwords and Usernames In the web browser interface you can enter passwords and optional user names To Configure or Remove Usernames and Passwords in the Web Browser Interface 1 Click on the Security tab Click on Device Passwords 2 Do one of the following e To set username and password protection enter the usernames and passwords you want in the appropriate fields e Toremove username and password protection leave the fields blank 3 Implement the usernames and passwords by clicking on Apply Changes To access the web based help provided for the switch click on in the web browser screen 2 6 Configuring Username and Password Security Front Panel Security Front Panel Security The front panel security features provide the ability to independently enable or disable some of the functions of the two buttons located on the front of the
128. as an untagged member of another VLAN port N loses access to that other VLAN for the duration of the session This is because a port can be an untagged member of only one VLAN at a time 8 54 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X How RADIUS 802 1X Authentication Affects VLAN Operation For example suppose that a RADIUS authenticated 802 1X aware client on port A2 requires access to VLAN 22 but VLAN 22 is configured for no access on port A2 and VLAN 33 is configured as untagged on port A2 CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Switch Configuration VLAN VLAN Port Assignment default vlan vilan_22 vian_33 Untagged No a Ic Unt agged gt Untagged Forbid Untagged Tagged Scenario An F x authorized 802 1X 7 client requires access to VLAN 22 from port Help A2 However access to VLAN 22 is blocked Cancel changes and return to previous not untagged or Use arrow kevs to change action selection and lt Enter gt to executi tagged on port A2 and Figure 8 10 Example of an Active VLAN Configuration In figure 8 10 if RADIUS authorizes an 802 1X client on port 2 with the requirement that the client use VLAN 22 then m VLAN 22 becomes available as Untagged on port A2 for the duration of the session m VLAN 33 becomes unavailable to port A2 for the duration of the session because there can be only one untagged VLAN on any port You can use the show vlan lt vlan id gt command
129. assume that you did not configure these two servers with a server specific key Use a dead time of five minutes for a server that fails to respond to an authentication request Allow three seconds for request timeouts Allow two retries following a request that did not receive a response ProCurve config aaa authentication num attempts 2 ProCurve config radius server key My Global Key 1099 ProCurve config radius server dead time 5 ProCurve config radius server timeout 3 ProCurve config radius server retransmit 2 ProCurve config write mem Figure 5 5 Example of Global Configuration Exercise for RADIUS Authentication 5 14 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Configuring the Switch for RADIUS Authentication ProCurve show authentication Status and Counters Authentication Information Respect Privilege Disabled 7 entry errors the switch will terminate the session Login Login Enable Enable Access Task Primary Secondary Primary Secondary Console Telnet Radius Radius Port Access Local Webui Local Local SSH Radius Radius Web Auth ChapRadius MAC Auth ChapRadius ProCurve show radius Status and Counters General RADIUS Information 7 Deadtime min EAT parameters Timeout secs 3 Retransmit Attempts Global Encryption Key My Global Key 1099 Server specific encryption key for the RADIUS server that will not use the global encryption key 1813 sou
130. at allows LAN access only to users who enter the authorized RADIUS username and password on 802 1 X capable clients sup plicants This simplifies security management by allowing you to control 8 5 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Overview LI a access from a master database in a single server although you can use up to three RADIUS servers to provide backups in case access to the primary server fails It also means a user can enter the same username and password pair for authentication regardless of which switch is the access point into the LAN Note that you can also configure 802 1X for authentication through the switch s local username and password instead of a RADIUS server but doing so increases the administrative burden decentralizes username password administration and reduces security by limiting authentication to one Oper ator Manager password set for all users Providing a Path for Downloading 802 1X Supplicant Software For clients that do not have the necessary 802 1X supplicant software there is also the option to configure the 802 1X Open VLAN mode This mode allows you to assign such clients to an isolated VLAN through which you can provide the necessary supplicant software these clients need to begin the authentication process Refer to 802 1X Open VLAN Mode on page 8 26 Authenticating One Switch to Another 802 1X authentication also enables the switch
131. atically configured as a member of a VLAN that is also configured as the Unauthorized Client or Authorized Client VLAN See also Untagged Membership in a VLAN Unauthorized Client VLAN A conventional static VLAN statically config ured on the switch It is used to provide access to a client prior to authentication and is sometimes termed a guest VLAN It should be set up to allow an unauthenticated client to access only the initialization services necessary to establish an authenticated connection plus any other desirable services whose use by an unauthenticated client poses no security threat to your network Note that an unauthenticated client has access to all network resources that have membership in the VLAN you 8 8 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Terminology designate as the Unauthorized Client VLAN A port configured to use a given Unauthorized Client VLAN does not have to be statically configured as amember of that VLAN as long as at least one other port on the switch is statically configured as a tagged or untagged member of the same Unauthorized Client VLAN An unauthorized client VLAN is available on a port only if there is no authenticated client already using the port Untagged Membership in a VLAN A port can be an untagged member of only one VLAN In the factory default configuration all ports on the switch are untagged members of the default VLAN An untagged VLAN membership is
132. ation applications The switch s web browser interface SNMP with a correct community name Also when configured in the switch the Authorized IP Managers feature takes precedence over local passwords TACACS RADIUS Port Based Access Control 802 1X and Port Security This means that the IP address of a networked management device must be authorized before the switch will attempt to authenticate the device by invoking other access security features If the Authorized IP Managers feature disallows access to the device then access is denied Thus with authorized IP managers configured having the correct passwords is not sufficient for accessing the switch through the network unless the station attempting access is also included in the switch s Authorized IP Managers configuration You can use Authorized IP Managers along with other access security features to provide a more comprehensive security fabric than if you use only one or two security options Refer to table 1 1 Management Access Security Protec tion page 1 4 for a listing of access security features with the security coverage they provide 10 2 Caution Note Using Authorized IP Managers Access Levels Configuration Options You can configure Upto 10 authorized manager addresses where each address applies to either a single management station or a group of stations m Manager or Operator access privileges for Telnet SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c a
133. ation requests to a RADIUS server that has failed to respond to a previous request This avoids a wait for a request to time 5 7 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Configuring the Switch for RADIUS Authentication out on a server that is unavailable If you want to use this feature select a dead time period of 1 to 1440 minutes Default 0 disabled range 1 1440 minutes If your first choice server was initially unavailable but then becomes available before the dead time expires you can nullify the dead time by resetting it to zero and then trying to log on again As an alternative you can reboot the switch thus resetting the dead time counter to assume the server is available and then try to log on again e Number of Login Attempts This is an aaa authentication command It controls how many times in one session a RADIUS client as well as clients using other forms of access can try to log in with the correct username and password Default Three times per session For RADIUS accounting features refer to Configuring RADIUS Accounting on page 5 17 1 Configure Authentication for the Access Methods You Want RADIUS To Protect This section describes how to configure the switch for RADIUS authentication through the following access methods Console Either direct serial port connection or modem connection m Telnet Inbound Telnet must be enabled the default SSH To employ RADIUS for SSH access you
134. ation session The 802 1X Open VLAN mode solves this problem by temporarily suspending the port s static tagged and untagged VLAN memberships and placing the port in a designated Unauthorized Client VLAN In this state the client can proceed with initialization services such as acquiring IP addressing and 802 1X software and starting the authentication process 8 26 Note Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X 802 1X Open VLAN Mode On ports configured to allow multiple sessions using 802 1X client based access control all clients must use the same untagged VLAN On a given port where there are no currently active authenticated clients the first awthenti cated client determines the untagged VLAN in which the port will operate for all subsequent overlapping client sessions If the switch operates in an environment where some valid clients will not be running 802 1X supplicant software and need to download it from your network Then because such clients would need to use the Unauthorized Client VLAN and authenticated clients would be using a different VLAN for security reasons allowing multiple clients on an 802 1X port can result in blocking some or all clients needing to use the Unauthorized Client VLAN On ports configured for port based 802 1X access control if multiple clients try to authenticate on the same port the most recently authenticated client determines the untagged VLAN membership for
135. authorized access is usually not desirable 802 1X simplifies security management by providing access control along with the ability to control user profiles from up to three RADIUS servers while allowing a given user to use the same entering valid user credentials for access from multiple points within the network General Features 802 1X on the ProCurve switches covered in this manual includes the follow ing Switch operation as both an authenticator for supplicants having a point to point connection to the switch and as a supplicant for point to point connections to other 802 1X aware switches e Authentication of 802 1X clients using a RADIUS server and either the EAP or CHAP protocol e Provision for enabling clients that do not have 802 1 supplicant soft ware to use the switch as a path for downloading the software and initiating the authentication process 802 1X Open VLAN mode Client Based access control option with support for up to 2 authenticated clients per port 8 3 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Overview Port Based access control option allowing authentication by a single client to open the port This option does not force a client limit and on a port opened by an authenticated client allows unlimited client access without requiring further authentication e Supplicant implementation using CHAP authentication and indepen dent username and password configuration on eac
136. aying the New Configuration Configuring Username and Password Security Front Panel Security Re Enabling the Clear Button on the Switch s Front Panel and Setting or Changing the Reset On Clear Operation Syntax no front panel security password clear reset on clear This command does both of the following e Re enables the password clearing function of the Clear button on the switch s front panel e Specifies whether the switch reboots if the Clear button is pressed To re enable password clear you must also specify whether to enable or disable the reset on clear option Defaults password clear Enabled reset on clear Disabled Thus e To enable password clear with reset on clear disabled use this syntax no front panel security password clear reset on clear e To enable password clear with reset on clear also enabled use this syntax front panel security password clear reset on clear Either form of the command enables password clear Note If you disable password clear and also disable the password recovery option you can still recover from a lost password by using the Reset Clear button combination at reboot as described on page 2 9 Although the Clear button does not erase passwords when disabled you can still use it with the Reset button Reset Clear to restore the switch to its factory default configuration You can then get access to the switch to set a new password For example
137. boot or reload occurs e System accounting is turned on or off Note that there is no time span associated with using the system option It simply causes the switch to transmit whatever accounting data it currently has when one of the above events occurs m Network Use Network if you want to collect accounting information on 802 1X port based access users connected to the physical ports on the switch to access the network See also Accounting on page 2 For information on this feature refer to Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X on page 8 1 Determine how you want the switch to send accounting data to a RADIUS server 5 22 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Configuring RADIUS Accounting m Start Stop e Senda start record accounting notice at the beginning of the account ing session and a stop record notice at the end of the session Both notices include the latest data the switch has collected for the requested accounting type Network Exec or System e Do not wait for an acknowledgement The system option page 5 22 ignores start stop because the switch sends the accumulated data only when there is a reboot reload or accounting on off event m Stop Only e Send a stop record accounting notice at the end of the accounting session The notice includes the latest data the switch has collected for the requested accounting type Network Exec or System e Do not wait for an ac
138. cause switch access through a web proxy server requires that you first add the web proxy server to the Authorized Manager IP list This reduces security by opening switch access to anyone who uses the web proxy server The following two options outline how to eliminate a web proxy server from the path between a station and the switch 10 12 Using Authorized IP Managers Operating Notes Even if you need proxy server access enabled in order to use other applications you can still eliminate proxy service for web access to the switch To do so add the IP address or DNS name of the switch to the non proxy or Exceptions list in the web browser interface you are using on the authorized station If you don t need proxy server access at all on the authorized station then just disable the proxy server feature in the station s web browser interface 10 13 Using Authorized IP Managers Operating Notes 10 14 Index Numerics 3DES 6 3 7 3 802 1X See port based access control 8 1 802 1X access control authentication methods 8 4 authentication client based 8 4 authenticator 8 17 client based access 8 4 See also port based client authentication 8 4 client limit 8 3 8 4 8 41 client limit enable 8 18 clients use same VLAN 8 27 convert to port based 8 19 enable 8 18 8 42 limit 8 4 tagged VLAN 8 4 VLAN 8 33 client based vs port based 8 14 client li
139. ccess Attempts Privilege Level Primary Secondary Console Login local none Local username password access only tacacs local lf Tacacs server unavailable uses local username password access Console Enable local none Local username password access only tacacs local If Tacacs server unavailable uses local username password access Telnet Login local none Local username password access only tacacs local If Tacacs server unavailable uses local username password access tacacs none If Tacacs server unavailable denies access Telnet Enable local none Local username password access only tacacs local If Tacacs server unavailable uses local username password access tacacs none If Tacacs server unavailable denies access When local is the primary option you can also select local as the secondary option However in this case a secondary local is meaningless because the switch has only one local level of username password protection Caution Regarding During local authentication which uses passwords configured in the switch the Use of Local for instead of in a TACACS server the switch grants read only access if you Login Primary enter the Operator password and read write access if you enter the Manager Access password For example if you configure authentication on the switch with Telnet Login Primary as Local and Telnet Enable Primary as Tacacs when you attempt to Telnet to the switch y
140. ccess only Configuring Authorized IP Managers does not protect access to the switch through a modem or direct connection to the Console RS 232 port Also if an authorized station spoofs an authorized IP address it can gain manage ment access to the switch even though a duplicate IP address condition exists For these reasons you should enhance your network s security by keeping physical access to the switch restricted to authorized personnel using the username password and other security features available in the switch and preventing unauthorized access to data on your management stations Access Levels The Authorized IP Manager feature can assign an access level to stations using Telnet SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c for switch access The access level the switch allows for authorized stations using SSH SNMPv3 or the web browser interface is determined by the access application itself and not by the Autho rized IP Manager feature For each authorized manager address using Telnet SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c you can configure either of these access levels m Manager Enables full access to all web browser and console inter face screens for viewing configuration and all other operations available in these interfaces Operator Allows read only access from the web browser and console interfaces This is the same access that is allowed by the switch s operator level password feature Using Authorized IP Managers Defining Authoriz
141. ccess to the switch Telnet Console etc RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Configuring RADIUS Accounting ProCurve config radius server host 10 33 18 151 acet port 1750 key sourceO1i51 ProCurve config write mem ProCurve config show radius Status and Counters General RADIUS Information Deadtime min 5 i Because the radius server command Timeout secs 3 includes an acct port element with a non Retransmit Attempts 2 default 1750 the switch assigns this value to Global Encryption Key the accounting port UDP port numbers Because auth port was not included in the Auth Acet command the authentication UDP portis set Server IP Addr Port Port Encryption Key to the default 1812 10 33 16 151 1812 1750 source0i5i Figure 5 7 Example of Configuring for a RADIUS Server with a Non Default Accounting UDP Port Number The radius server command as shown in figure 5 7 above configures the switch to use a RADIUS server at IP address 10 33 18 151 with a non default UDP accounting port of 1750 and a server specific key of source0151 2 Configure Accounting Types and the Controls for Sending Reports to the RADIUS Server Select the Accounting Type s m Exec Use exec if you want to collect accounting information on login sessions on the switch via the console Telnet or SSH See also Accounting on page 5 2 m System Use system if you want to collect accounting data when e A system
142. ce The key remains in the switch even if you reset the switch to its factory default configuration You can remove or replace this key pair if necessary Copy the switch s public key to the SSH clients you want to access the switch page 6 12 Enable SSH on the switch page 6 15 Configure the primary and secondary authentication methods you want the switch to use In all cases the switch will use its host public key to authenticate itself when initiating an SSH session with a client e SSH Login Operator options Option A Primary Local TACACS or RADIUS password Secondary Local password or none If the primary method is local the secondary method cannot be local Option B Primary Client public key authentication login public key page 6 23 Secondary None Note that if you want the switch to perform client public key authentication you must configure the switch with Option B e SSH Enable Manager options Primary Local TACACS or RADIUS Secondary Local password or none If the primary method is local the secondary method cannot be local Use your SSH client to access the switch using the switch s IP address or DNS name if allowed by your SSH client application Refer to the documentation provided with the client application 6 7 Configuring Secure Shell SSH General Operating Rules and Notes General Operating Rules and Notes m Public keys generated on an SSH client must be e
143. cess mac based e lt port list gt logoff period lt 60 9999999 gt Specifies the period in seconds that the switch enforces for an implicit logoff This parameter is equivalent to the MAC age interval in a traditional switch sense If the switch does not see activity after a logoff period interval the client is returned to its pre authentication state Default 300 seconds Syntax aaa port access mac based e lt port list gt max requests lt 1 10 gt Specifies the number of authentication attempts that must time out before authentication fails Default 2 3 24 Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Syntax Web and MAC Authentication Configuring MAC Authentication on the Switch aaa port access mac based e lt port list gt quiet period lt 1 65535 gt Specifies the time period in seconds the switch should wait before attempting an authentication request for a MAC address that failed authentication Default 60 seconds aaa port access mac based e lt port list gt reauth period lt 0 9999999 gt Specifies the time period in seconds the switch enforces on a client to re authenticate When set to 0 reauthentication is disabled Default 300 seconds aaa port access mac based e lt port list gt reauthenticate Forces a reauthentication of all attached clients on the port aaa port access mac based e lt port list gt server timeout lt 1 300 gt Specifies the p
144. cess to any statically configured untagged VLANs and client access is blocked The assigned port VLAN remains in place until the session ends Clients may be forced to reauthenticate after a fixed period of time reauth period or at any time during a session reauthenticate An implicit logoff period can be set if there is no activity from the client after a given amount of time logoff period In addition a session ends if the link on the port is lost requiring reauthenti cation of all clients Also if a client moves from one port to another and client moves have not been enabled addr moves on the ports the session ends and the client must reauthenticate for network access At the end of the session the port returns to its pre authentication state Any changes to the port s VLAN memberships made while it is an authenticated port take affect at the end of the session A client may not be authenticated due to invalid credentials or a RADIUS server timeout The server timeout parameter sets how long the switch waits to receive a response from the RADIUS server before timing out The max requests parameter specifies how many authentication attempts may result in a RADIUS server timeout before authentication fails The switch waits a specified amount of time quiet period before processing any new authenti cation requests from the client Network administrators may assign unauthenticated clients to a specific static untagged VLAN unaut
145. ch other access type console in this case open in case the Telnet access fails due to a configuration problem The following procedure outlines a general setup procedure Note If a complete access lockout occurs on the switch as a result of a TACACS configuration see Troubleshooting TACACS Operation in the Trouble shooting chapter of the Management and Configuration Guide for your switch 1 Familiarize yourself with the requirements for configuring your TACACS server application to respond to requests from a switch Refer to the documentation provided with the TACACS server software This includes knowing whether you need to configure an encryption key See Using the Encryption Key on page 4 23 Determine the following The IP address es of the TACACS server s you wantthe switch to use for authentication If you will use more than one server determine which server is your first choice for authentication services The encryption key if any for allowing the switch to communicate with the server You can use either a global key or a server specific key depending on the encryption configuration in the TACACS server s The number of log in attempts you will allow before closing a log in session Default 3 The period you want the switch to wait for a reply to an authentication request before trying another server The username password pairs you wantthe TACACS server to use for controllin
146. cifies an authorized IP address of 10 33 xxx 1 It could be applied for example to a subnetted network where each subnetis defined by the maps Is iN cea a third octet and includes a management station defined by the value of 1 in the g fourth octet of the station s IP address IP Mask 255 238 255 250 Allows 230 231 246 and 247 in the 2nd octet and 194 195 198 199 in the 4th octet Authorized 10 247 100 195 Manager IP Operating Notes Network Security Precautions You can enhance your network s security by keeping physical access to the switch restricted to autho rized personnel using the password features built into the switch using the additional security features described in this manual and preventing unauthorized access to data on your management stations Modem and Direct Console Access Configuring authorized IP managers does not protect against access to the switch through a modem or direct Console RS 232 port connection Duplicate IP Addresses If the IP address configured in an autho rized management station is also configured or spoofed in another station the other station can gain management access to the switch even though a duplicate IP address condition exists Web Proxy Servers If you use the web browser interface to access the switch from an authorized IP manager station it is recommended that you avoid the use of a web proxy server in the path between the station and the switch This is be
147. credentials to get network access Optional You can use the Open VLAN mode to provide a path for clients without 802 1X supplicant software to down load this software and begin the authentication process Refer to S02 1X Open VLAN Mode on page 8 26 unauthorized Also termed Force Unauthorized Do not grant access to the network regardless of whether the device provides the correct credentials and has 802 1X support In this state the port blocks access to any connected device 8 20 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Configuring Switch Ports as 802 1X Authenticators quiet period lt 0 65535 gt Sets the period during which the port does not try to acquire a supplicant The period begins after the last attempt authorized by the max requests parameter fails next page Default 60 seconds tx period lt 0 65535 gt Sets the period the port waits to retransmit the next EAPOL PDU during an authentication session Default 30 seconds supplicant timeout lt 1 300 gt Sets the period of time the switch waits for a supplicant response to an EAP request If the supplicant does not respond within the configured time frame the session times out Default 30 seconds server timeout lt 1 300 gt Sets the period of time the switch waits for a server response to an authentication request If there is no response within the configured time frame the switch
148. cumentation provided with your RADIUS application 8 14 Note Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X General Setup Procedure for 802 1X Access Control Overview Configuring 802 1X Authentication on the Switch This section outlines the steps for configuring 802 1X on the switch For detailed information on each step refer to RADIUS Authentication and Accounting on page 5 1 or Configuring Switch Ports To Operate As Suppli cants for 802 1X Connections to Other Switches on page 8 42 1 Enable 802 1X authentication on the individual ports you want to serve as authenticators On the ports you will use as authenticators either accept the default 802 1X settings or change them as necessary Note that by default the port control parameter is set to auto for all ports on the switch This requires aclient to support 802 1X authentication and to provide valid credentials to get network access Refer to page 8 17 If you want to provide a path for clients without 802 1X supplicant software to download the software so that they can initiate an authenti cation session enable the 802 1X Open VLAN mode on the ports you want to support this feature Refer to page 8 26 Configure the 802 1X authentication type Options include e Local Operator username and password the default This option allows a client to use the switch s local username and password as valid 802 1X credentials for network access
149. d For example suppose port Al allows one authorized device and already has a device listed ProCurve config show port security al Port Security Port Al Learn Mode Continuous Static Address Limit 1 1 Action None None Authorized Addresses 0c0090 123456 Figure 9 6 Example of Port Security on Port A1 with an Address Limit of 1 To add a second authorized device to port A1 execute a port security command for port A1 that raises the address limit to 2 and specifies the additional device s MAC address For example ProCurve config port security al mac address 0c0090 456456 address limit 2 Removing a Device From the Authorized List for a Port Configured for Learn Mode Static This command option removes unwanted devices MAC addresses from the Authorized Addresses list An Authorized Address list is available for each port for which Learn Mode is currently set to Static See the MAC Address entry in the table on 9 8 9 15 Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Port Security Command Options and Operation Caution Note The address limit setting controls how many MAC addresses are allowed in the Authorized Addresses list for a given port If you remove a MAC address without also reducing the address limit by 1 the port may later detect and accept the same or another MAC address that you do not want in the Autho rized Address list Thus if you use the CLI to remove a MAC
150. d Configuration of MAC Based Authentication 3 28 Show Client Status 0 0 cece cece ence eens 3 30 4 TACACS Authentication CONTENES nanara Ega 46 ENE ais alana doe Saaband Pawel dd wars Mawarsieacs 4 1 QVELVICW Aidai See E aa Wa Sa aad a age ee eho Ben cacn ac bo etter eed 4 2 Terminology Used in TACACS Applications 0004 4 3 General System Requirements 00 0 c eee eee ee eens 4 5 General Authentication Setup Procedure 2 2 0 eee eee 4 5 Configuring TACACS on the Switch 0 20 00 eee eee eee 4 8 Before You Begin 2 2 ec cece ecb eben ecb nee ebenes 4 8 CLI Commands Described in this Section 2 4 9 Viewing the Switch s Current Authentication Configuration 4 9 Viewing the Switch s Current TACACS Server Contact Configuration 00 4 10 Configuring the Switch s Authentication Methods 4 11 Configuring the Switch s TACACS Server Access 4 15 How Authentication Operates 0 0c cece eee eens 4 20 General Authentication Process Using a TACACS Server 4 20 Local Authentication Process 0 2 e cee cece eee eee 4 22 Using the Encryption Key 0 00 e cece eee eee eens 4 23 Controlling Web Browser Interface Access When Using TACACS Authentication 0 2 cece cee ene eee bebe nee eens 4 24 Messages Related to TACACS Operation 0
151. d Notes CLI commands used to generate a Server Host Certificate Syntax crypto key generate cert rsa lt 512 768 11024 gt Generates a key pair for use in the certificate crypto key zeroize cert Erases the switch s certificate key and disables SSL opera tion crypto host cert generate self signed arg list Generates a self signed host certificate for the switch If a switch certificate already exists replaces it with a new certificate See the Note on page 7 9 crypto host cert zeroize Erases the switch s host certificate and disables SSL opera tion To generate a host certificate from the CLI i Generate a certificate key pair This is done with the crypto key generate cert command The default key size is 512 Note If a certificate key pair is already present in the switch it is not necessary to generate a new key pair when generating a new certificate The existing key pair may be re used and the crypto key generate cert command does not have to be executed ii Generate a new self signed host certificate This is done with the crypto host cert generate self signed Arg List command Note When generating a self signed host certificate on the CLI if there is not certificate key generated this command will fail Comments on Certificate Fields There are a number arguments used in the generation of a server certificate table 7 1 Certificate Field Descriptions describes these arguments 7
152. digital signature over a stream of bytes It is used by CHAP to perform authentication without revealing the shared secret password PVID Port VID This is the VLAN ID for the untagged VLAN to which an 802 1X port belongs Port Based Authentication In this operation the first client on a port to authenticate itself unblocks the port for the duration of the client s 802 1X authenticated session The switches covered in this guide use port based authentication Static VLAN A VLAN that has been configured as permanent on the switch by using the CLI vlan lt vid gt command or the Menu interface Supplicant The entity that must provide the proper credentials to the switch before receiving access to the network This is usually an end user work station but it can be a switch router or another device seeking network services Tagged Membership in a VLAN This type of VLAN membership allows a port to be a member of multiple VLANs simultaneously If a client connected to the port has an operating system that supports 802 1Q VLAN tagging then the client can access VLANs for which the port is a tagged member If the client does not support VLAN tagging then it can access only a VLAN for which the port is an untagged member A port can be an untagged member of only one port based VLAN at a time Where a port is a tagged member of a VLAN 802 1X Open VLAN mode does not affect the port s access to the VLAN unless the port is st
153. dure for 802 1X Access Control 8 13 Do These Steps Before You Configure 802 1X Operation 8 13 Overview Configuring 802 1X Authentication on the Switch 8 14 Configuring Switch Ports as 802 1X Authenticators 8 16 1 Enable 802 1X Authentication on Selected Ports 8 16 2 Reconfigure Settings for Port Access 0 02 ee eae 8 19 3 Configure the 802 1X Authentication Method 8 22 4 Enter the RADIUS Host IP Address es 0 0 5 8 23 5 Enable 802 1X Authentication on the Switch 8 23 6 Optionally Resetting Authenticator Operation 8 24 802 1X Open VLAN Mode 2 eect een E EE 8 25 Introduction 3 see each ah eee ti wee a ee aden 8 25 VLAN Membership Priorities 00 0 0 e eee eee eee ee 8 26 Use Models for 802 1X Open VLAN Modes 8 27 Operating Rules for Authorized Client and Unauthorized Client VLANS 0 c cece cee nee nee 8 30 8 1 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Contents Setting Up and Configuring 802 1X Open VLAN Mode 802 1X Open VLAN Operating Notes 02 00 eee eee Option For Authenticator Ports Configure Port Security To Allow Only 802 1X Devices r 0 5 cee eee nb een bee eben cree R Configuring Switch Ports To Operate As Supplicants for 802 1X Connections to Other Switches
154. e a printed guide shipped with your switch This guide explains how to prepare for and perform the physical installation and connection to your network Management and Configuration Guide a PDF file on the ProCurve Networking Web Site This guide describes how to configure manage and monitor basic switch operation m Advanced Traffic Management Guide a PDF file on the ProCurve Networking Web Site This guide explains the configuration and operation of traffic management features such as spanning tree and VLANs m Access Security Guide a PDF file on the ProCurve Networking Web Site This guide explains the configuration and operation of access security and user authentication features on the switch Release Notes posted on the ProCurve web site to provide information on software updates The release notes describe new features fixes and enhancements that become available between revisions of the above guides For the latest version of all ProCurve switch documentation including release notes covering recently added features visit the ProCurve Networking website at www procurve com Click on Technical support and then click on Product manuals all xi Product Documentation Feature Index For the manual set supporting your switch model the following feature index indicates which manual to consult for information on a given software feature Feature Managementand AdvancedtTraffic Access Security Configurat
155. e send alarm send disable gt Specifies whether an SNMP trap is sent to a network man agement station Operates when e Learn mode is set to learn mode static static learn or learn mode configured static configured and the port detects an unauthorized device e Learn mode is set to learn mode continuous and there is a MAC address change on a port none the default Prevents an SNMP trap from being sent send alarm Causes the switch to send an SNMP trap to a network management station send disable Available only with learn mode configured and learn mode static Causes the switch to send an SNMP trap to a network management station and disable the port If you subsequently re enable the port without clearing the port s intrusion flag the port will block further intruders but the switch will not disable the port again until you reset the intrusion flag See the Note on page 9 19 For information on configuring the switch for SNMP management refer to the Management and Configuration Guide for your switch clear intrusion flag Clears the intrusion flag for a specific port Refer to Reading Intrusion Alerts and Resetting Alert Flags on page 9 17 9 9 Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Port Security Command Options and Operation Retention of Static MAC Addresses Learned MAC Addresses In the following two cases a port in Static learn mode learn mode static retains a learned MAC address ev
156. e 5 11 Term Definition Round Trip Time The time interval between the most recent Accounting Response and the Accounting Pending Requests Retransmissions Timeouts Malformed Responses Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dropped Access Requests Accounting Requests Access Challenges Access Accepts Access Rejects Responses Request that matched it from this RADIUS accounting server The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets sent to this server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when an accounting Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Accounting Response a timeout or a retransmission The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets retransmitted to this RADIUS accounting server Retransmissions include retries where the Identifier and Acct Delay have been updated as well as those in which they remain the same The number of accounting timeouts to this server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as an Accounting Request as well as a timeout The number of malformed RADIUS Accounting Response packets received from this server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators and unknown types are not included as malformed accounting responses The
157. e show tacacs to view the current IP address list If the first choice TACACS server fails to respond to a request the switch tries the second address if any in the show tacacs list If the second address also fails then the switch tries the third address if any See figure 4 3 Example of the Switch s TACACS Configuration Listing on 4 10 The priority first choice second choice and third choice of a TACACS server in the switch s TACACS configuration depends on the order in which you enter the server IP addresses 1 When there are no TACACS servers configured entering a server IP address makes that server the first choice TACACS server 2 When there is one TACACS serves already configured entering another server IP address makes that server the second choice backup TACACS server 3 When there are two TACACS servers already configured entering another server IP address makes that server the third choice backup TACACS server e The above position assignments are fixed Thus if you remove one server and replace it with another the new server assumes the priority position that the removed server had For example suppose you configured three servers A B and C configured in order First Choice A Second Choice B Third Choice C e Ifyou removed server B and then entered server X the TACACS server order of priority would be First Choice A Second Choice X Third Choice C e Ifthere are two or more
158. e switch then the only way to recover from a lost manager username password pair is to use the Reset Clear button combination described under Restoring the Factory Default Configuration on page 2 9 This can disrupt network operation and make it necessary to temporarily disconnect the switch from the network to prevent unauthorized access and other problems while it is being reconfig ured To use the password recovery option to recover a lost password 1 Note the switch s base MAC address It is shown on the label located on the upper right front corner of the switch 2 Contact your ProCurve Customer Care Center for further assistance Using the switch s MAC address the ProCurve Customer Care Center will generate and provide a one time use alternate password you can use with the to gain management access to the switch Once you gain access you can configure a new known password 2 17 Configuring Username and Password Security Front Panel Security Note The alternate password provided by the ProCurve Customer Care Center is valid only for a single login attempt You cannot use the same one time use password if you lose the password a second time Because the password algorithm is randomized based upon your switch s MAC address the password will change as soon as you use the one time use password provided to you by the ProCurve Customer Care Center 2 18 Web and MAC Authentication Co
159. ecessary Default 3 aaa port access web based e lt port list gt quiet period lt 1 65535 gt Specifies the time period in seconds the switch should wait before attempting an authentication request for a client that failed authentication Default 60 seconds aaa port access web based e lt port list gt reauth period lt 0 9999999 gt Specifies the time period in seconds the switch enforces on a client to re authenticate When set to 0 reauthentication is disabled Default 300 seconds aaa port access web based e lt port list gt reauthenticate Forces a reauthentication of all attached clients on the port 3 20 Web and MAC Authentication Configuring Web Authentication Syntax aaa port access web based e lt port list gt redirect url lt urb no aaa port access web based e lt port ist gt redirect url Specifies the URL that a user is redirected to after a successful login Any valid fully formed URL may be used for example http welcome server welcome him or hitp 192 22 17 5 ProCurve recommends that you provide a redirect URL when using Web Authentica tion Use the no form of the command to remove a specified redirect URL Default There is no default URL Browser behavior for authenticated clients may not be acceptable Syntax aaa port access web based e lt port list gt server timeout lt 1 300 gt Specifies the period in seconds the switch waits f
160. ecified addresses to reach the address limit Thus if you configure an address limit of 3 but only configure two MAC addresses the switch will handle as intruders all non specified MAC addresses it detects Port Access Enables you to use Port Security with 802 1X Port Based Access Control Refer to Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X on page 8 1 address limit lt integer gt When Learn Mode is set to static static learn or configured static configured this parameter specifies the number of authorized devices MAC addresses to allow Default 1 Range 1 to 8 mac address lt mac addr gt Available for static static learn and configured learn modes Allows up to eight authorized devices MAC addresses per port depending on the value specified in the address limit parameter e If you use mac address with learn mode configured but enter fewer devices than you specified in the address limit field the port accepts only the devices you specified with mac address See the Note above If you use mac address with learn mode static but enter Sewer devices than you specified in the address limit field the port accepts the specified devices AND as many other devices as it takes to reach the device limit 9 8 Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Port Security Command Options and Operation Syntax port security e lt port list gt Continued action lt non
161. ecomes an untagged member of this VLAN when the client becomes authenticated When the client disconnects the port returns to tagged membership in this VLAN If the port is statically configured as a tagged member of a VLAN that is not used by 802 1X Open VLAN mode the port returns to tagged membership in this VLAN upon successful authentication This happens even if the RADIUS server assigns the port to another authorized VLAN If the port is already configured as a tagged member of a VLAN that RADIUS assigns as an authorized VLAN then the port becomes an untagged member of that VLAN for the duration of the client connection After the client disconnects the port returns to tagged membership in that VLAN Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X 802 1X Open VLAN Mode Table 8 1 802 1X Open VLAN Mode Options 802 1X Per Port Configuration Port Response Open VLAN Mode with Only an Unauthorized Client VLAN Configured When the port detects a client it automatically becomes an untagged member of this VLAN To limit security risks the network services and access available on this VLAN should include only what a client needs to enable an authentication session Ifthe port is statically configured as an untagged member of another VLAN the switch temporarily removes the port from membership in this other VLAN while membership in the Unauthorized Client VLAN exists After the client is authenticated a
162. ed The port received a request for identification from an authenticator Authenticating Authentication is in progress Held Authenticator sent notice of failure The supplicant port is waiting for the authenticator s held period page 8 44 For descriptions of the supplicant parameters refer to Configuring a Supplicant Switch Port on page 8 44 show port access supplicant e lt port list gt statistics Shows the port access statistics and source MAC address es for all ports or lt port list gt ports configured on the switch as supplicants See the Note on Suppli cant Statistics below Note on Supplicant Statistics For each port configured as a supplicant show port access supplicant statistics e lt port list gt displays the source MAC address and statistics for transactions with the authenticator device most recently detected on the port If the link between the supplicant port and the authenticator device fails the supplicant port continues to show data received from the connection to the most recent authenticator device until one of the following occurs m The supplicant port detects a different authenticator device m You use the aaa port access supplicant e lt port list gt clear statistics command to clear the statistics for the supplicant port m The switch reboots Thus if the supplicant s link to the authenticator fails the supplicant retains the transaction statistics it mo
163. ed Management Stations Defining Authorized Management Stations m Authorizing Single Stations The table entry authorizes a single management station to have IP access to the switch To use this method just enter the IP address of an authorized management station in the Authorized Manager IP column and leave the IP Mask set to 255 255 255 255 This is the easiest way to use the Authorized Managers feature For more on this topic see Configuring One Station Per Authorized Manager IP Entry on page 10 9 Authorizing Multiple Stations The table entry uses the IP Mask to authorize access to the switch from a defined group of stations This is useful if you want to easily authorize several stations to have access to the switch without having to type an entry for every station All stations in the group defined by the one Authorized Manager IP table entry and its associated IP mask will have the same access level Manager or Operator For more on this topic refer to Config uring Multiple Stations Per Authorized Manager IP Entry on page 10 10 To configure the switch for authorized manager access enter the appropriate Authorized Manager IP value specify an IP Mask and select either Manager or Operator for the Access Level The IP Mask determines how the Authorized Manager IP value is used to allow or deny access to the switch by a manage ment station Overview of IP Mask Operation The default IP Mask is 255 255 255 255
164. ed VLAN the switch temporarily moves the port to the Unauthorized Client VLAN also untagged While the Unauthorized Client VLAN is in use the port does not access the static untagged VLAN e When the client either becomes authenticated or disconnects the port leaves the Unauthorized Client VLAN and reacquires its untagged membership in the statically configured VLAN e When a client becomes authenticated on a port that is already configured with a static untagged VLAN the switch temporarily moves the port to the Authorized Client VLAN also untagged While the Authorized Client VLAN is in use the port does not have access to the statically configured untagged VLAN e Whenthe authenticated clientdisconnects the switch removes the port from the Authorized Client VLAN and moves it back to the untagged membership in the statically configured VLAN After client authentication the port resumes any tagged VLAN memberships for which itis already configured For details refer to the Note on page 8 28 You can use the same static VLAN as the Unauthorized Client VLAN for all 802 1X authenticator ports configured on the switch Similarly you can use the same static VLAN as the Authorized Client VLAN for all 802 1X authenticator ports configured on the switch Caution Do not use the same static VLAN for both the unauthorized and the Authorized Client VLAN Using one VLAN for both creates a security risk by defeating the isolation of unau
165. ed in the switch include a server specific encryption key 4 Activate authentication on the switch Syntax aaa port access authenticator active Activates 802 1X port access on ports you have config ured as authenticators 5 Test both the authorized and unauthorized access to your system to ensure that the 802 1X authentication works properly on the ports you have configured for port access 8 36 Note Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X 802 1X Open VLAN Mode If you want to implement the optional port security feature on the switch you should first ensure that the ports you have configured as 802 1X authenticators operate as expected Then refer to Option For Authenticator Ports Configure Port Security To Allow Only 802 1X Devices on page 8 40 After you complete steps 1 and 2 the configured ports are enabled for 802 1X authentication without VLAN operation and you are ready to configure VLAN Operation Configuring 802 1X Open VLAN Mode Use these commands to actually configure Open VLAN mode For a listing of the steps needed to prepare the switch for using Open VLAN mode refer to Preparation on page 8 34 Syntax aaa port access authenticator e lt port list gt auth vid lt vlan id gt Configures an existing static VLAN to be the Authorized Client VLAN lt unauth vid lt vlan id gt Configures an existing static VLAN to be the Unautho rized Client VL
166. efer to CLI commands used to generate a Server Host Certificate on page 7 10 Enabling SSL on the CLI or Web browser interface You have not generated a host certificate Refer to Generate a Self Signed Host Certificate with the Web browser interface on page 7 12 You may be using a reserved TCP port Refer to Note on Port Number on page 7 20 Unable to Connect with SSL You may not have SSL enabled Refer to 3 Enable SSL on the Switch and Anticipate SSL Browser Contact Behavior on page 7 17 Your browser may not support SSLv3 or TLSv1 or it may be disabled Refer to the documentation provided for your browser 7 21 Configuring Secure Socket Layer SSL Common Errors in SSL Setup 7 22 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Contents OVERVIEW meide fie ae ead Go RAS PAAR SS eee 8 2 Why Use Port Based or Client Based Access Control 8 2 General Features 0 0 ccc cee ence ene n ences 8 2 User Authentication Methods 0 0 00 c cece eects 8 3 FEFMIMOIlO SY orien as teeta abs oe eae Rooks BAe Wine ed Rane TEE amides 8 6 General 802 1X Authenticator Operation 2 0 02 eee 8 9 Example of the Authentication Process 2 20000 8 9 Switch Port Supplicant Operation 20 02 e eee ee eee 8 10 General Operating Rules and Notes 0 0 c cece eee e eens 8 11 General Setup Proce
167. en if you later reboot the switch or disable port security for that port m Theport learns a MAC address after you configure the port with learn mode static in both the startup config file and the running config file by executing write memory m Theport learns a MAC address after you configure the port with learn mode static in only the running config file and after the address is learned you execute write memory to configure the startup config file to match the running config file Assigned Authorized MAC Addresses If you manually assign a MAC address using mac address lt mac addr gt and then execute write memory the assigned MAC address remains in memory unless removed by one of the methods described below Removing Learned and Assigned Static MAC Addresses To remove a static MAC address do one of the following m Delete the address by using no port security lt port number gt mac address lt mac addr gt Download a configuration file that does not include the unwanted MAC address assignment Reset the switch to its factory default configuration Displaying Current Port Security Settings The CLI uses the same command to provide two types of port security listings m All ports on the switch with their Learn Mode and alarm Action m Only the specified ports with their Learn Mode Address Limit alarm Action and Authorized Addresses 9 10 Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Port Security Com
168. erial port or Telnet access for configuration lt enable login gt Selects either the Manager enable or Operator login access level lt local tacacs radius gt Selects the type of security access local Authenticates with the Manager and Operator password you configure in the switch tacacs Authenticates with a password and other data configured on a TACACS server radius Authenticates with a password and other data configured on a RADIUS server Refer to RADIUS Authentication and Accounting on page 5 1 lt local none gt If the primary authentication method fails determines whether to use the local password as a secondary method or to disallow access aaa authentication num attempts lt 1 10 gt Specifies the maximum number of login attempts allowed in the current session Default 3 4 11 TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Switch Table 4 1 AAA Authentication Parameters Name Default Range Function console n a n a Specifies whether the command is configuring authentication for the console port Or or Telnet access method for the switch telnet enable n a n a Specifies the privilege level for the access method being configured or login Operator read only privileges login enable Manager read write privileges local local n a Specifies the primary method of authentication for the access method being or configured tacacs local
169. eries of values that are a subset of the 0 255 range by using a value that is greater than 0 but less than 255 10 10 Using Authorized IP Managers Building IP Masks Table 10 2 Analysis of IP Mask for Multiple Station Entries 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Manager Level or Operator Level Device Access Octet Octet Octet Octet IP Mask 255 255 255 0 The 255 in the first three octets of the mask specify that only the exact value in the octet of the corresponding IP address is allowed However anhonere y a az i the zero 0 in the 4th octet of the mask allows any value between 0 and g 255inthatoctetofthe corresponding IP address This mask allows switch access to any device having an IP address of 10 28 227 xxx where xxxis any value from 0 to 255 IP Mask 255 255 255 249 In this example figure 10 5 below the IP mask allows a group of up to A 4 management stations to access the switch This is useful if the only PEE 10 28 cad 125 devices in the IP address group allowed by the mask are management stations The 249 in the 4th octet means that bits 0 and 3 7 of the 4th octet are fixed Conversely bits 1 and 2 of the 4th octet are variable Any value that matches the authorized IP address settings for the fixed bits is allowed for the purposes of IP management station access to the switch Thus any management station having an IP address of 10 28 227 121 123 125 or 127 can access the switch 4th Octet of IP Mask
170. eriod in seconds the switch waits for a server response to an authentication request Depend ing on the current max requests value the switch sends a new attempt or ends the authentication session Default 30seconds aaa port access mac based e lt port list gt unauth vid lt vid gt no aaa port access mac based e lt port list gt unauth vid Specifies the VLAN to use for a client that fails authen tication If unauth vid is 0 no VLAN changes occur Use the no form of the command to set the unauth vid to 0 Default 0 3 25 Web and MAC Authentication Show Status and Configuration of Web Based Authentication Show Status and Configuration of Web Based Authentication Syntax Syntax Command Page show port access port lis web based 326 clients 3 26 config 3 26 config auth server 3 27 config web server 3 27 show port access port list web based config detail 3 27 Syntax show port access port list web based Shows the status of all Web Authentication enabled ports or the specified ports The number of authorized and unauthorized clients is listed for each port as well as its current VLAN ID Ports without Web Authenti cation enabled are not listed show port access port list web based clients Shows the port address Web address session status and elapsed session time for attached clients on all ports or the specified ports Ports with multiple clients have an entry for
171. erver Second Choice TACACS Server Switch Via Switch s Console Port ProCurve Switch A Configured for TACACS Operation Optional Third Choice TACACS Server Optional Terminal B Remotely ProCurve Switch Accessing This Switch Via Telnet Configured for TACACS Operation 4 20 TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Switch Figure 4 6 Using a TACACS Server for Authentication Using figure 4 6 above after either switch detects an operator s logon request from a remote or directly connected terminal the following events occur l The switch queries the first choice TACACS server for authentication of the request If the switch does not receive a response from the first choice TACACS server it attempts to query a secondary server If the switch does not receive a response from any TACACS server then it uses its own local username password pairs to authenti cate the logon request See Local Authentication Process on page 4 22 If a TACACS server recognizes the switch it forwards a user name prompt to the requesting terminal via the switch When the requesting terminal responds to the prompt with a username the switch forwards it to the TACACS server After the server receives the username input the requesting terminal receives a password prompt from the server via the
172. es SSL on the switch port lt 1 65535 default 443 gt The TCP port number for SSL connections default 443 Important See Note on Port Number on page 7 20 show config Shows status of the SSL server When enabled web management ssl appears in the config list To enable SSL on the switch 1 Generate a Host certificate if you have not already done so Refer to 2 Generate the Switch s Server Host Certificate on page 7 8 2 Execute the web management ssl command To disable SSL on the switch do either of the following Execute no web management ssl m Zeroize the switch s host certificate or certificate key page 7 9 Using the Web Browser Interface to Enable SSL To enable SSL on the switch i Proceed to the Security tab then the SSL button ii Select SSL Enable to on and enter the TCP port you desire to connect on iii Click on the Apply Changes button to enable SSL on the port To disable SSL on the switch do either of the following i Proceed to the Security tab then the SSL button ii Select SSL Enable to off iii Click on the Apply Changes button to enable SSL on the port Configuring Secure Socket Layer SSL General Operating Rules and Notes ProCurve Networking zz Status Information I HP Innovation identity Status Proci 2510 24 J901 9A Goniguration Security Diagnostics Support Device Passwords Authorized Addresse Port Security Intrus
173. ess port list mac based 38 clients 3 28 config 3 28 config auth server 3 29 show port access port list mac based config detail 3 29 Syntax show port access port list mac based Syntax Syntax Shows the status of all MAC Authentication enabled ports or the specified ports The number of authorized and unauthorized clients is listed for each port as well as its current VLAN ID Ports without MAC Authenti cation enabled are not listed show port access port list mac based clients Shows the port address MAC address session status and elapsed session time for attached clients on all ports or the specified ports Ports with multiple clients have an entry for each attached client Ports without any attached clients are not listed show port access port list mac based config Shows MAC Authentication settings for all ports or the specified ports including the MAC address format being used The authorized and unauthorized VLAN IDs are shown If the authorized or unauthorized VLAN ID is 0 then no VLAN change is made unless the RADIUS server supplies one 3 28 Web and MAC Authentication Show Status and Configuration of MAC Based Authentication Syntax show port access port list mac based config auth server Shows MAC Authentication settings for all ports or the specified ports along with the Radius server specific settings for the timeout wait the number of timeout failures before authenticatio
174. essage To Recover from a Lost Manager Password If you cannot start a con sole session at the Manager level because of a lost Manager password you can clear the password by getting physical access to the switch and pressing and holding the Clear button for a minimum of one second This action deletes all passwords and usernames Manager and Operator used by both the console and the web browser interface CLI Setting Passwords and Usernames Commands Used in This Section password See below Configuring Manager and Operator Passwords Syntax no password lt manager operator gt user name ASCII STR no password lt all gt ProCurve config password manager e Password entries appear N dv eieeaee ee ee ee as asterisks ae aaa a You must type the Please retype new password password entry twice ProCurve config password operator New password Please retype new password Figure 2 2 Example of Configuring Manager and Operator Passwords 2 5 Configuring Username and Password Security Configuring Local Password Security To Remove Password Protection Removing password protection means to eliminate password security This command prompts you to verify that you wantto remove one or both passwords then clears the indicated password s This command also clears the username associated with a password you are removing For example to remove the Operator password
175. et Figure 4 1 Example of TACACS Operation Access Request Al A4 Path for Request from Terminal A Through Console Port TACACS in the switch manages authentication of logon attempts through either the Console port or Telnet TACACS uses an authentication hierarchy consisting of 1 remote passwords assigned in a TACACS server and 2 local passwords configured on the switch That is with TACACS configured the switch first tries to contact a designated TACACS server for authentica Notes TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Switch tion services If the switch fails to connect to any TACACS server it defaults to its own locally assigned passwords for authentication control if it has been configured to do so For both Console and Telnet access you can configure a login read only and an enable read write privilege level access The software does not support TACACS authorization or accounting services TACACS does not affect web browser interface access See Controlling Web Browser Interface Access on page 4 24 Terminology Used in TACACS Applications NAS Network Access Server This is an industry term for a TACACS aware device that communicates with a TACACS server for authentication services Some other terms you may see in literature describing TACACS operation are communication server remote access server or terminal
176. et password after the command is invoked aaa port access supplicant ethernet lt port list gt auth timeout lt 1 300 gt Sets the period of time the port waits to receive a challenge from the authenticator If the request times out the port sends another authentication request up to the number of attempts specified by the max start parameter Default 30 seconds max start lt 1 10 gt Defines the maximum number of times the supplicant port requests authentication See step 1 on page 8 43 for a description of how the port reacts to the authen ticator response Default 3 held period lt 0 65535 gt Sets the time period the supplicant port waits after an active 802 1X session fails before trying to re acquire the authenticator port Default 60 seconds 8 45 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Configuring Switch Ports To Operate As Supplicants for 802 1X Connections to Other Switches start period lt 1 300 gt Sets the time period between Start packet retransmis sions That is after a supplicant sends a start packet it waits during the start period for a response If no response comes during the start period the supplicant sends anew start packet The max start setting above specifies how many start attempts are allowed in the session Default 30 seconds aaa port access supplicant ethernet lt port list gt initialize On the specified ports bloc
177. execute action Figure 1 2 Getting Help in the Menu Interface 1 7 Getting Started Need Only a Quick Start m Forinformation on a specific command in the CLI type the command name followed by help For example ProCurve write help Usage write lt memory terminal gt Description View or save the running configuration of the switch write terminal displays the running configuration of the switch on the terminal write memory Saves the running configuration of the switch to flash The saved configuration becomes the boot up configuration of the switch the next time it is booted Figure 1 3 Getting Help in the CLI For information on specific features in the Web browser interface use the online help For more information refer to the Management and Configuration Guide for your switch For further information on ProCurve Networking switch technology visit the ProCurve Networking Website at www procurve com Need Only a Quick Start IP Addressing If you just want to give the switch an IP address so that it can communicate on your network or if you are not using multiple VLANs ProCurve recommends that you use the Switch Setup screen to quickly configure IP addressing To do so do one of the following Enter setup at the CLI Manager level prompt ProCurve setup m Or run the Menu interface and select 8 Run Setup from the Main Menu For more on using the Switch Setup screen see the Ins
178. fault configuration This can disrupt network operation and make it necessary to temporarily disconnect the switch from the network to prevent unauthorized access and other problems while it is being reconfigured Also with factory reset enabled unauthorized users can use the Reset Clear button combination to reset the switch to factory default configuration and gain management access to the switch 2 15 Configuring Username and Password Security Front Panel Security Syntax no front panel security password recovery Enables or using the no form of the command disables the ability to recover a lost password When this feature is enabled the switch allows management access through the password recovery process described below This provides a method for recovering from a lost manager username if configured and password When this feature is disabled the password recovery process is disabled and the only way to regain management access to the switch is to use the Reset Clear button combination page 2 9 to restore the switch to its factory default configuration Note To disable password recovery You must have physical access to the front panel of the switch The factory reset parameter must be enabled the default Default Enabled Steps for Disabling Password Recovery 1 Set the CLI to the global interface context 2 Use show front panel security to determine whether the factory reset paramete
179. for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Hewlett Packard Company shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein The information is provided as is without warranty of any kind and is subject to change without notice The warranties for Hewlett Packard Company products are set forth in the express limited warranty statements for such products Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty Hewlett Packard assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software on equipment that is not furnished by Hewlett Packard Warranty See the Customer Support Warranty booklet included with the product A copy of the specific warranty terms applicable to your Hewlett Packard products and replacement parts can be obtained from your HP Sales and Service Office or authorized dealer Hewlett Packard Company 8000 Foothills Boulevard m s 5551 Roseville California 95747 5551 hitp www procurve com Contents Product Documentation About Your Switch Manual Set 0 0 cece eens xi Heature INGGx minione da pina a Rota Bear eRe AR oe le hosted ae aa xii Getting Started CONTENU 2 2 are e a aes thie ok aged Ue cine eek Mestre E A sure deepal ides 1 1 IMtroductiOny aissi oaa ls ane ae ees incce seed eee aie 1 2 Overview of Access Security Features
180. from any unauthorized devices that are connected to the port e Provides the option for sending an SNMP trap notifying of an attempted security violation to a network management station and optionally disables the port For more on configuring the switch for SNMP management refer to Trap Receivers and Authentication Traps in the Management and Configuration Guide for your switch Blocking Unauthorized Traffic Unless you configure the switch to disable a port on which a security violation is detected the switch security measures block unauthorized traffic without disabling the port This implementation enables you to apply the security configuration to ports on which hubs switches or other devices are connected and to maintain security while also maintaining network access to authorized users For example 9 3 Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Overview Physical Topology Switch A Port Security Configured PC1 MAC Address Authorized by Switch A Switch B PC2 MAC Address MAC Address NOT Authorized by Authorized by Switch A Switch A PC3 MAC Address NOT ones NOT Athor zeU by Sitet A Authorized by Switch A Figure 9 1 Example of How Port Security Controls Access Logical Topology for Access to Switch A Switch A Port Security Configured PC1 MAC Address Authorized by Switch A Switch B MAC Address Authorized by Switch A PC1 can access Switch A PCs 2 and 3 can access Switch B and
181. fter the quiet period expires credentials are resubmitted when client generates traffic Waiting for user credentials 3 30 TACACS Authentication Contents OVErVIEW siani a aca soca ee Paine Pati EE alah bony E E Goo ose Peres ead 4 2 Terminology Used in TACACS Applications 064 4 3 General System Requirements 0 0 0 cece eee ene eens 4 5 General Authentication Setup Procedure 02 0 eee eee 4 5 Configuring TACACS on the Switch 2 0 0 eee eee eee 4 8 Before You Begin 2 2 ect ue ier dnie bene eb bee E 4 8 CLI Commands Described in this Section 2 4 9 Viewing the Switch s Current Authentication Configuration 4 9 Viewing the Switch s Current TACACS Server Contact Configuration 00 c ccc eee eee 4 10 Configuring the Switch s Authentication Methods 4 11 Configuring the Switch s TACACS Server Access 4 15 How Authentication Operates 000s cece eee eee 4 20 General Authentication Process Using a TACACS Server 4 20 Local Authentication Process 0 cece eee eee eens 4 22 Using the Encryption Key 0 cece cece eee eee 4 23 Controlling Web Browser Interface Access When Using TACACS Authentication 0 cece a cence tenet bene ee eens 4 24 Messages Related to TACACS Operation 00 0200 4 25 Operating Notes 2 c5s0c5 cbse
182. g a Non 802 1X Device Note Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Option For Authenticator Ports Configure Port Security To Allow Only 802 1X Devices If the port s 802 1X authenticator control mode is configured to authorized as shown below instead of auto then the first source MAC address from any device whether 802 1X aware or not becomes the only authorized device on the port aaa port access authenticator lt port list gt control authorized With 802 1X authentication disabled on a port or set to authorized Force Authorize the port may learn a MAC address that you don t want authorized If this occurs you can block access by the unauthorized non 802 1X device by using one of the following options m If802 1X authentication is disabled on the port use these command syntaxes to enable it and allow only an 802 1X aware device aaa port access authenticator e lt port list gt Enables 802 1X authentication on the port aaa port access authenticator e lt port list gt control auto Forces the port to accept only a device that supports S02 1X and supplies valid credentials m If802 1X authentication is enabled on the port but set to authorized Force Authorized use this command syntax to allow only an 802 1X aware device aaa port access authenticator e lt port list gt control auto Forces the port to accept only a device that supports S02 1X and supplies valid credentials
183. g access to the switch The privilege level you want for each username password pair administered by the TACACS server for controlling access to the switch The username password pairs you want to use for local authentication one pair each for Operator and Manager levels 3 Plan and enter the TACACS server configuration needed to support TACACS operation for Telnet access login and enable to the switch This includes the username password sets for logging in at the Operator read only privilege level and the sets for logging in at the Manager read write privilege level Note on Privilege Levels Caution TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Switch When a TACACS server authenticates an access request from a switch it includes a privilege level code for the switch to use in determining which privilege level to grant to the terminal requesting access The switch interprets a privilege level code of 15 as authorization for the Manager read write privilege level access Privilege level codes of 14 and lower result in Operator read only access Thus when configuring the TACACS server response to a request that includes a username pass word pair that should have Manager privileges you must use a privilege level of 15 For more on this topic refer to the documentation you received with your TACACS server application If you are a first time user of the TACACS service ProCurve recom mends that y
184. g new R5A key If the key entropy cache is Key for the depleted this could take up to a minute Switch ProCurve config show crypto host public key SSH host public key file Version 1 format 896 35 3219295003103011452137203169501232714847265325085720757925409572738582167 49173126937413223781326827636154399173519641900117298772018339016754333892246319 41759125186557710233731689070801858880718460531164552600040416069890120011153581 9449254242176260739141950918771764467 Version 1 and Version 2 Views Version 2 format of Same Host Public Key ssh rsa AAAABSNzallyc2EAAAABIWAAAHEAnAAAD GHG 13Iynrs 7j41DUmsbiv nsld2mZUSe 2Zup T6 QzP2RsDDMZLbAHHIBrxPLjW bRogpyYDOlLWuVOhToj EV qeVuxbimdDnyOgBcObolePwdrbQ FZevERiaA JYG3CENCZCRD djXel 7 FuRpssw Figure 6 6 Example of Generating a Public Private Host Key Pair for the Switch The show crypto host public key displays data in two different formats because your client may store it in either of these formats after learning the key If you wish to compare the switch key to the key as stored in your client s known hosts file note that the formatting and comments need not match For version 1 keys the three numeric values bit size exponent lt e gt and modulus lt n gt must match for PEM keys only the PEM encoded string itself must match Notes Zeroizing the switch s key automatically disables SSH sets ip ssh to no Thus if you zeroize the key and then generate a ne
185. ged VLAN Also an authenticated client can use any tagged VLAN memberships statically configured on the port provided the client is config ured to use the tagged VLAN memberships available on the port 8 4 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Overview 802 1X Port Based Access Control 802 1X port based access control provides port level security that allows LAN access only on ports where a single 802 1X capable client supplicant has entered authorized RADIUS user credentials For reasons outlined below this option is recommended for applications where only one client at a time can connect to the port Using this option the port processes all traffic as if it comes from the same client Thus in a topology where multiple clients can connect to the same port at the same time m Ifthe first client authenticates and opens the port and then another client authenticates the port responds as if the original client has initiated a reauthentication With multiple clients authenticating on the port the RADIUS configuration response to the latest client authentication replaces any other configuration from an earlier client authentication If all clients use the same configuration this should not be a problem But if the RADIUS server responds with different configurations for different clients then the last client authenticated will effectively lock out any previously authenticated client When any client to authent
186. ged to No That is your evidence that the Intrusion Alert flag has been acknowledged reset is that the Intrusion Alert column in the port status display no longer shows Yes for the port on which the intrusion occurred port A3 in this example Because the Intrusion Log provides a history of the last 20 intrusions detected by the switch resetting the alert flags does not change its content Thus displaying the Intrusion Log again will result in the same display as in figure 9 10 above 9 21 Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Reading Intrusion Alerts and Resetting Alert Flags CLI Checking for Intrusions Listing Intrusion Alerts and Resetting Alert Flags The following commands display port status including whether there are intrusion alerts for any port s list the last 20 intrusions and either reset the alert flag on all ports or for a specific port for which an intrusion was detected The record of the intrusion remains in the log For more information refer to Operating Notes for Port Security on page 9 25 Syntax show interfaces brief List intrusion alert status and other port status informa tion show port security intrusion log List intrusion log content clear intrusion flags Clear intrusion flags on all ports port security e lt port number gt clear intrusion flag Clear the intrusion flag on one or more specific ports In the following example executing show interfaces brief
187. gers Authorized Manager IP IP Mask Access Level 413 28 227 161 255 255 255 252 Manager 13 28 227 164 255 255 255 254 Manager 13 28 227 166 255 255 255 0 Operator 13 28 227 125 255 255 255 255 Manager 1 Select Add to add an authorized manager ye to the list Actions gt Back Add Edit Delete Help Return to previous screen Use up down arrow keys to change record selection left right arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to execute action Figure 10 1 Example of How To Add an Authorized Manager Entry TELNET MANAGER MODE Using Authorized IP Managers Defining Authorized Management Stations Be CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Switch Configuration IP P Enter an Authorized Manager IP address here l Authorized Manager IP M 3 Use the default mask to allow access by one IP Mask 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 management device or edit the mask to allow Access Level Manager access by a block of management devices See i eee Building IP Masks on page 10 9 4 Use the Space bar to select Manager or Operator Actions gt Cancel Edit Save Help access 5 Press Enter then S for Save to configure the IP Authorized Manager entry and lt Enter gt to go to Actions Applies onlyto access through Telnet SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c Refer to the Note on page 10 3 Figure 10 2 Example of How To Add an Autho
188. h port Prevention of traffic flow in either direction on unauthorized ports Local authentication of 802 1X clients using the switch s local user name and password as an alternative to RADIUS authentication Temporary on demand change of a port s VLAN membership status to support a current client s session This does not include ports that are members of a trunk m Session accounting with a RADIUS server including the accounting update interval m Use of Show commands to display session counters User Authentication Methods The switch offers two methods for using 802 1 X access control Generally the Port Based method supports one 802 1 X authenticated client on a port which opens the port to an unlimited number of clients The Client Based method supports up to two 802 1X authenticated clients on a port In both cases there are operating details to be aware of that can influence your choice of methods 802 1X Client Based Access Control 802 1X operation with access control ona per client basis provides client level security that allows LAN access to individual 802 1X clients up to 2 per port where each client gains access to the LAN by entering valid user credentials This operation improves security by opening a given port only to individually authenticated clients while simultaneously blocking access to the same port for clients that cannot be authenticated All sessions must use the same untag
189. h vid to provide access to specific guest network resources If no VLAN is assigned to unauthenticated clients the port remains in its original VLAN configuration Should another client successfully authenticate through that port any unauthenticated clients are dropped from the port 3 8 Web and MAC Authentication Terminology Terminology Authorized Client VLAN Like the Unauthorized Client VLAN this is a conventional static untagged port based VLAN previously configured on the switch by the System Administrator The intent in using this VLAN is to provide authenticated clients with network access and services When the client connection terminates the port drops its membership in this VLAN Authentication Server The entity providing an authentication service to the switch for example a RADIUS server Authenticator In ProCurve switch applications a device that requires a client or device to provide the proper credentials MAC address or username and password before being allowed access to the network CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol Also known as CHAP RADIUS Client In this application an end node device such as amanagement station workstation or mobile PC linked to the switch through a point to point LAN link Redirect URL A System Administrator specified web page presented to an authorized client following Web Authentication ProCurve recommends specifying this URL when configuring
190. he TACACS server refer to the documentation you received with the application Encryption Options in the Switch When configured the encryption key causes the switch to encrypt the TACACS packets it sends to the server When left at null the TACACS packets are sent in clear text The encryption key or just key you configure in the switch must be identical to the encryption key configured in the corresponding TACACS server If the key is the same for all TACACS servers the switch will use for authentication then configure a global key in the switch If the key is different for one or more of these servers use server specific keys in the switch If you configure both a global key and one or more per server keys the per server keys will override the global key for the specified servers TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Switch For example you would use the next command to configure a global encryp tion key in the switch to match a key entered as north40campus in two target TACACS servers That is both servers use the same key for your switch Note that you do not need the server IP addresses to configure a global key in the switch ProCurve config tacacs server key north40campus Suppose that you subsequently add a third TACACS server with an IP address of 10 28 227 87 that has south10campus for an encryption key Because this key is different than the one used for the two server
191. he port returns to tagged membership in VLAN X If there is no Authorized Client or 8 38 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X 802 1X Open VLAN Mode RADIUS assigned VLAN then an authenticated client without tagged VLAN capability can access only a statically configured untagged VLAN on that port When a client s authentication attempt on an Unauthorized Client VLAN fails the port remains a member of the Unauthorized Client VLAN until the client disconnects from the port During an authentication session on a port in 802 1X Open VLAN mode if RADIUS specifies membership in an untagged VLAN this assignment overrides port membership in the Authorized Client VLAN If there is no Authorized Client VLAN configured then the RADIUS assignment overrides any untagged VLAN for which the port is statically configured If the only authenticated client on a port loses authentication during a session in 802 1X Open VLAN mode the port VLAN membership reverts back to the Unauthorized Client VLAN If there is no Unauthorized Client VLAN configured then the client loses access to the port until it can reauthenticate itself If there are multiple clients authenticated on the port if one client loses access and attempts to re authenticate that client will be handled as a new client on the port The first client to authenticate on a port configured to support multiple clients will determine the port s VLAN members
192. her Information on SSH Client Public Key Authentication Copying a client public key into the switch requires the following m Oneormore client generated public keys Refer to the documentation provided with your SSH client application A copy of each client public key up to ten stored in a single text file or individual on a TFTP server to which the switch has access Terminate all client public keys in the file except the last one with a lt CR gt lt LF gt Note on Public The actual content of a public key entry in a public key file is determined by Keys the SSH client application generating the key Although you can manually add or edit any comments the client application adds to the end of the key such as the smith fellow at the end of the key in figure 6 14 on page 6 24 Syntax copy tftp pub key file lt p address gt lt filename gt lt append manager operator gt Copies a public key file from a TFTP server into flash memory in the switch The append option adds the key s for operator access The manager option replaces the key s for manager access follow with the append option to add the key s The operator option replaces the key s for operator access default follow with the append option to add the key s show crypto client public key manager operator keylist str babble fingerprint Displays the client public key s in the switch s current client public key file The manager optio
193. hip for any subsequent clients that authenticate while an active session is already in effect Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Option For Authenticator Ports Configure Port Security To Allow Only 802 1X Devices Note Option For Authenticator Ports Configure Port Security To Allow Only 802 1X Devices If you use port security on authenticator ports you can configure it to learn only the MAC address of the first 802 1X aware device detected on the port Then only traffic from this specific device is allowed on the port When this device logs off another 802 1X aware device can be authenticated on the port Syntax port security ethernet lt port list gt learn mode port access Configures port security on the specified port s to allow only the first 802 1X aware device the port detects action lt none send alarm send disable gt Configures the port s response in addition to blocking unauthorized traffic to detecting an intruder Port Security operates with 802 1X authentication as described above only if the selected ports are configured as 802 1X that is with the control mode in the port access authenticator command set to auto For example to configure port A10 for 802 1X authenticator operation and display the result ProCurve config aaa port access authenticator e A10 control auto ProCurve config show port access authenticator e A10 config 8 40 Note on Blockin
194. host To use show radius the server s IP address must be configured in the switch which requires prior use of the radius server host command See Configuring RADIUS Accounting on page 5 17 ProCurve config show radius Status and Counters General RADIUS Information Deadtime min 5 Timeout secs 10 Retransmit Attempts 2 Global Encryption Key mygl0balkey Auth Acct Server IP Addr Port Port Encryption Key 192 33 12 65 1812 1813 mys6Skey Figure 5 10 Example of General RADIUS Information from Show Radius Command RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Viewing RADIUS Statistics ProCurve config show radius host 192 33 12 65 Status and Counters RADIUS Server Information Server IP Addr 192 33 12 65 Authentication UDP Port 1812 Round Trip Time i Pending Requests Retransmissions Timeouts Malformed Responses Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dropped Access Requests Access Challenges Access Accepts Access Rejects 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 0 Accounting UDP Port Round Trip Time Pending Requests Retransmissions Timeouts Malformed Responses Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dropped Accounting Requests Accounting Responses Figure 5 11 RADIUS Server Information From the Show Radius Host Command H co H Q URTO DODO COOG0 O4 5 26 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Viewing RADIUS Statistics Table 5 2 Values for Show Radius Host Output Figur
195. how protected ports Protected ports 4 5 Unprotected ports 1 3 6 26 Figure 9 16 Example Showing Protected Ports and Unprotected Ports If you display the running config file show running config you will see the ports that have been selected as protected ports ProCurve config show running config Running configuration J9019B Configuration Editor Created on release Q 11 XX hostname ProCurve Switch 2510 24 snmp server community public Unrestricted vian 1 name DEFAULT_VLAN untagged 1 26 ip address dhcp bootp exit protected ports 4 5 lt q Protected ports Figure 9 17 Example of Running Config File Showing Protected Ports In the example in Figure 9 18 ports 1 through 8 are protected Port 2 connects to Room 2 and Port 4 connects to Room 4 Ports 9 and 10 are unprotected and provide access to the internet Ports 2 and 4 are able to access the internet but are not able to communicate with each other or any of the other rooms that are connected to protected ports Ports 1 8 are protected and cannot communicate with each other They can only communicate with the 9 10 unprotected ports 9 and 10 Protected Unprotected Switch Router or Internet Figure 9 18 Example With Ports 1 8 Protected and Ports 9 and 10 Unprotected 9 28 10 Using Authorized IP Managers Contents OVEV EW elses aaa Seta AEA EE aceon ead dare eb Wee Wa
196. ia encrypted paths between the switch and management station clients capable of SSL TLS operation ProCurve switches use SSL and TLS for all secure web transactions and all references to SSL mean using one of these algorithms unless otherwise noted SSL provides all the web functions but unlike standard web access SSL provides encrypted authenticated transactions The authentication type includes server certificate authentication with user password authentication SSLin ProCurve switches is based on the OpenSSL software toolkit For more information on OpenSSL visit www openssl com Server Certificate authentication with User Password Authentication This option is a subset of full certificate authentication of the user and host It occurs only if the switch has SSL enabled As in figure 7 1 the switch authenticates itself to SSL enabled web browser Users on SSL browser then authenticate themselves to the switch operator and or manger levels by providing passwords stored locally on the switch or on a TACACS or RADIUS server However the client does not use a certificate to authenti cate itself to the switch 7 2 Configuring Secure Socket Layer SSL Terminology prot iv e 1 Switch to Client SSL Cert woe SSL Client Switch a Browser je 2 User to Switch login password and SSL enable password authentication Server options Local TACACS RADIUS
197. ic Key Listing From Figure 6 12 6 21 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Configuring the Switch for SSH Operation 6 Use an SSH Client To Access the Switch Test the SSH configuration on the switch to ensure that you have achieved the level of SSH operation you want for the switch If you have problems refer to RADIUS Related Problems in the Troubleshooting chapter of the Manage ment and Configuration Guide for your switch 6 22 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Further Information on SSH Client Public Key Authentication Further Information on SSH Client Public Key Authentication The section titled 5 Configure the Switch for SSH Authentication on page 6 18 lists the steps for configuring SSH authentication on the switch However if you are new to SSH or need more details on client public key authentication this section may be helpful When configured for SSH operation the switch automatically attempts to use its own host public key to authenticate itself to SSH clients To provide the optional opposite service client public key authentication to the switch you can configure the switch to store up to ten RSA or DSA public keys for authenticating clients This requires storing an ASCII version of each client s public key without babble conversion or fingerprint conversion in a client public key file that you create and TFTP copy to the switch In this case only clients that have a private key corresponding
198. icate closes its session the port will also close and remain so until another client successfully authenticates m The most recent client authentication determines the untagged VLAN membership for the port Also any client able to use the port can access any tagged VLAN memberships statically configured on the port provided the client is configured to use the available tagged VLAN memberships m Ifthe first client authenticates and opens the port and then one or more other clients connect without trying to authenticate then the port config uration as determined by the original RADIUS response remains unchanged and all such clients will have the same access as the authenti cated client When the authenticated client closes the session the port will also be closed to any other unauthenticated clients that may have also been using the port This operation unblocks the port while an authenticated client session is in progress In topologies where simultaneous multiple client access is possible this can allow unauthorized and unauthenticated access by another client while an authenticated client is using the port If you want to allow only authenticated clients on the port then client based access control page 8 4 should be used instead of port based access control Using the client based method enables you to specify up to 2 authenticated clients Authenticating Users Port Based Access Control 802 1X provides switch level security th
199. ient s public key into a public key file which can contain up to ten client public keys 3 Copy the public key file into a TFTP server accessible to the switch and download the file to the switch For more on these topics refer to Further Information on SSH Client Public Key Authentication on page 6 23 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Configuring the Switch for SSH Operation Caution With steps 1 3 above completed and SSH properly configured on the switch if an SSH client contacts the switch login authentication automatically occurs first using the switch and client public keys After the client gains login access the switch controls client access to the manager level by requiring the passwords configured earlier by the aaa authentication ssh enable command Syntax copy tftp pub key file lt ip address gt lt filename gt Copies a public key file into the switch aaa authentication ssh login public key Configures the switch to authenticate a client public key at the login level with an optional secondary password method Default none To allow SSH access only to clients having the correct public key you must configure the secondary password method for login public key to none Otherwise a client without the correct public key can still gain entry by submitting a correct local login password Syntax aaa authentication ssh enable lt local tacacs radius gt lt local none gt Configures a
200. ig show front panel securi ty Clear Password Enabled Displays the current front ae ee pases z hisabteg panel security configuration Password Recovery _ Enabled _ with Factory Reset disabled Figure 2 10 Example of Disabling the Factory Reset Option Password Recovery The password recovery feature is enabled by default and provides a method for regaining management access to the switch without resetting the switch to its factory default configuration in the event that the system administrator loses the local manager username if configured or password Using Pass word Recovery requires m password recovery enabled the default on the switch prior to an attempt to recover from a lost username password situation Contacting your ProCurve Customer Care Center to acquire a one time use password Disabling or Re Enabling the Password Recovery Process Disabling the password recovery process means that the only method for recovering from a lost manager username if configured and password is to reset the switch to its factory default configuration which removes any non default configuration settings Caution Disabling password recovery requires that factory reset be enabled and locks out the ability to recover a lost manager username if configured and pass word on the switch In this event there is no way to recover from a lost manager username password situation without resetting the switch to its factory de
201. iguration on the switch If you make changes in the switch configu ration check Telnet access again If Telnet access still fails check the 4 7 TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Switch configuration in your TACACS server application for mis configura tions or missing data that could affect the server s interoperation with the switch After your testing shows that Telnet access using the TACACS server is working properly configure your TACACS server application for console access Then test the console access If access problems occur check for and correct any problems in the switch configuration and then test console access again If problems persist check your TACACS server application for mis configurations or missing data that could affect the console access When you are confident that TACACS access through both Telnet and the switch s console operates properly use the write memory command to save the switch s running config file to flash memory Configuring TACACS on the Switch Before You Begin If you are new to TACACS authentication ProCurve recommends that you read the General Authentication Setup Procedure on page 4 5 and configure your TACACS server s before configuring authentication on the switch The switch offers three command areas for TACACS operation show authentication and show tacacs Displays the switch s TACACS configuration and status aaa authenticat
202. iguration settings 3 4 Web and MAC Authentication How Web and MAC Authentication Operate How Web and MAC Authentication Operate Authenticator Operation Before gaining access to the network clients first present their authentication credentials to the switch The switch then verifies the supplied credentials with a RADIUS authentication server Successfully authenticated clients receive access to the network as defined by the System Administrator Clients who fail to authenticate successfully receive no network access or limited network access as defined by the System Administrator Web based Authentication When a client connects to a Web Auth enabled port communication is redi rected to the switch A temporary IP address is assigned by the switch and a login screen is presented for the client to enter their credentials User Login In order to access this network you must first log in Username Password Submit Figure 3 1 Example of User Login Screen The temporary IP address pool can be specified using the dhcp addr and dhcp lease options of the aaa port access web based command If SSL is enabled on the switch and ssl login is enabled on the port the client is redirected to a secure login page https The switch passes the supplied username and password to the RADIUS server for authentication 3 5 Web and MAC Authentication How Web and MAC Authentication Operate Authenticating
203. ion You can also use the Reset button together with the Clear button Reset Clear to restore the factory default configuration for the switch To do this 1 Press and hold the Reset button Reset Clear 2 While holding the Reset button press and hold the Clear button Reset Clear 2 9 Configuring Username and Password Security Front Panel Security 3 Release the Reset button and wait for about one second for the Self Test LED to start flashing Reset Clear m Test 4 When the Self Test LED begins flashing release the Clear button Reset Clear a E Self N Test This process restores the switch configuration to the factory default settings Configuring Front Panel Security Using the front panel security command from the global configuration context in the CLI you can e Disable or re enable the password clearing function of the Clear button Disabling the Clear button means that pressing it does not remove local password protection from the switch This action affects the Clear button when used alone but does not affect the operation of the Reset Clear combination described under Restor ing the Factory Default Configuration on page 2 9 e Configure the Clear button to reboot the switch after clearing any local usernames and passwords This provides an immediate visual means plus an Event Log message for verifying that any usernames and passwords in the switch have been cleared
204. ion A command for configuring the switch s authenti cation methods tacacs server A command for configuring the switch s contact with TACACS servers 4 8 TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Switch CLI Commands Described in this Section Command Page show authentication 4 9 show tacacs 4 10 aaa authentication pages 4 11 through 4 14 console Telnet num attempts lt 1 10 gt tacacs server pages 4 15 host lt ip addr gt pages 4 15 key 4 19 timeout lt 1 255 gt 4 20 Viewing the Switch s Current Authentication Configuration This command lists the number of login attempts the switch allows in a single login session and the primary secondary access methods configured for each type of access Syntax show authentication This example shows the default authentication configuration ProCurve gt show authentication Status and Counters Authentication Information Login Attempts 3 onfiguration for login and enable access Login Login Enable Enable c g g port F to the switch through the switch console Access Task Primary Secondary Primary Secondary Configuration for login and enable access to the switch through Telnet Figure 4 2 Example Listing of the Switch s Authentication Configuration TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Switch Viewing the Switch s Current TACACS Server Contact Configuration This command lists the timeout peri
205. ion Log bss oO SSL Settings SSL Enable Off v Port 443 Enable Ei and Port colo selection Figure 7 8 Using the web browser interface to enable SSL and select TCP port number Note on Port Number Caution ProCurve recommends using the default IP port number 443 However you can use web management ssl tcp port to specify any TCP port for SSL connec tions except those reserved for other purposes Examples of reserved IP ports are 23 Telnet and 80 http Some other reserved TCP ports on the switch are 49 80 1506 and 1513 SSL does not protect the switch from unauthorized access via the Telnet SNMP or the serial port While Telnet access can be restricted by the use of passwords local to the switch if you are unsure of the security this provides you may want to disable Telnet access no telnet If you need to increase SNMP security use SNMP version 3 only for SNMP access Another security measure is to use the Authorized IP Managers feature described in the switch s Security Guide To protect against unauthorized access to the serial port and the Clear button which removes local password protection keep physical access to the switch restricted to authorized personnel 7 20 Configuring Secure Socket Layer SSL Common Errors in SSL Setup Common Errors in SSL Setup Error During Possible Cause Generating host certificate on CLI You have not generated a certificate key R
206. ion Management Guide 802 10 VLAN Tagging X 802 1p Priority X 802 1X Authentication X Authorized IP Managers X Config File X Copy Command X Debug X DHCP Configuration X DHCP Bootp Operation Diagnostic Tools Downloading Software Event Log Factory Default Settings File Management x x X x xX XxX X File Transfers GVRP X IGMP X Interface Access Telnet Console Serial Web IP Addressing LACP x x x Xx Link xii Product Documentation Feature Managementand AdvancedtTraffic Access Security Configuration Management Guide LLDP X MAC Address Management X Monitoring and Analysis X Multicast Filtering X Network Management Applications LLDP SNMP X Passwords Ping X Port Configuration X Port Security Port Status X Port Trunking LACP X Port Based Access Control Port Based Priority 802 10 X Quality of Service QoS X RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Secure Copy X SFTP X SNMP X Software Downloads SCP SFTP TFTP Xmodem X Spanning Tree MSTP X SSH Secure Shell Encryption SSL Secure Socket Layer Stack Management Stacking X Syslog X System Information X TACACS Authentication xiii Product Documentation Feature Managementand AdvancedtTraffic Access Security Configuration Management Guide Telnet Access X TFTP X Time Protocols TimeP SNTP X Troubleshooting X VLANs X
207. ion includes an optional unauthorized VLAN unauth vid the port is temporarily placed in the unauthorized VLAN if there are no other authorized clients currently using the port with a different VLAN assignment If an authorized client is using the port with a different VLAN or if there isno unauthorized VLAN configured the unauthorized client does not receive access to the network Web or MAC based authentication and LACP cannot both be enabled on the same port 3 11 Web and MAC Authentication General Setup Procedure for Web MAC Authentication Note on Web MAC Authentication and LACP The switch does not allow Web or MAC Authentication and LACP to both be enabled at the same time on the same port The switch automatically disables LACP on ports configured for Web or MAC Authentication General Setup Procedure for Web MAC Authentication Do These Steps Before You Configure Web MAC Authentication l Configure a local username and password on the switch for both the Operator login and Manager enable access levels While this is not required for a Web or MAC based configuration ProCurve recommends that you use a local user name and password pair at least until your other security measures are in place to protect the switch configuration from unauthorized access Determine which ports on the switch you want to operate as authentica tors Note that before you configure Web or MAC based authentication on a por
208. itch To enable client public key authentication to block SSH clients whose public keys are not in the client public key file copied into the switch you must configure the Login Secondary as none Otherwise the switch allows such clients to attempt access using the switch s Operator password 6 28 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Messages Related to SSH Operation Messages Related to SSH Operation Message Meaning 00000K Peer unreachable Indicates an error in communicating with the tftp server or notfinding the file to download Causes include such factors as e Incorrect IP configuration on the switch e Incorrect IP address in the command e Case upper lower error in the filename used in the command e Incorrect configuration on the TFTP server e The file is not in the expected location e Network misconfiguration e No cable connection to the network 00000K Transport error Cannot bind reserved TCP port lt port number gt Client public key file corrupt or not found Use copy tftp pub key file lt ip addr gt lt filename gt to down load new file Indicates the switch experienced a problem when trying to copy tftp the requested file The file may not be in the expected directory the filename may be misspelled in the command or the file permissions may be wrong The ip ssh port command has attempted to configure a reserved TCP port Use the default or select another port number See
209. itch and reset the passwords This does however leave the switch vulnerable when it is located in an area where non authorized people have access to it Passwords could easily be cleared by pressing the Clear button Someone who has physical access to the switch may be able to erase the passwords and possibly configure new passwords and take control of the switch 2 7 Configuring Username and Password Security Front Panel Security As a result of increased security concerns customers now have the ability to stop someone from removing passwords by disabling the Clear and or Reset buttons on the front of the switch Front Panel Button Functions The front panel of the switch includes the Reset button and the Clear button SPS Spa Mode Ml Off 10 Mbps T Flash 100 Mbps On 1000 Mbps 10 100Base 1X I 2510 24 J9019A Console Reset Button Clear Button Figure 2 4 Example Front Panel Button Locations Clear Button Pressing the Clear button alone for one second resets the password s con figured on the switch Reset Clear Figure 2 5 Press the Clear Button for One Second To Reset the Password s 2 8 Configuring Username and Password Security Front Panel Security Reset Button Pressing the Reset button alone for one second causes the switch to reboot Reset Clear Figure 2 6 Press and hold the Reset Button for One Second To Reboot the Switch Restoring the Factory Default Configurat
210. ith the show vlan 33 command Even though port A2 is ProCurve show vlan 33 configured as Untagged on static VLAN 33 see figure 8 10 it does not appear in the VLAN 33 listing while the 802 1X session is using VLAN 22 in the Untagged status However after the 802 1X session with VLAN 22 ends the active configuration returns port A2 to VLAN 33 Status and Counters VLAN Information Ports VLAN 33 802 10 VLAN ID 33 Name VLAN_33 Status Static Overridden Port VLAN configuration Port Mode Figure 8 12 The Active Configuration for VLAN 33 Temporarily Drops Port 22 for the 802 1X Session 8 56 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X How RADIUS 802 1X Authentication Affects VLAN Operation When the 802 1X client s session on port A2 ends the port discards the temporary untagged VLAN membership At this time the static VLAN actually configured as untagged on the port again becomes available Thus when the RADIUS authenticated 802 1X session on port A2 ends VLAN 22 access on port A2 also ends and the untagged VLAN 33 access on port A2 is restored VLAN ID 33 After the 802 1X session VLAN 33 on VLAN 22 ends the Status Static active configuration again includes VLAN 33 Port Information Mode Unknown VLAN Status on port A2 Untagged Learn Tagged Learn Figure 8 13 The Active Configuration for VLAN 33 Restores Port A2 After the 802 1X Session Ends Notes
211. ius server host command to configure a RADIUS server IP address in the switch See Configuring RADIUS Accounting on page 5 17 ProCurve gt show authentication Status and Counters Authentication Information Login Attempts 2 Login Login Enable Enable Access Task Primary Secondary Primary Secondary Telnet Radius Port Access Local SSH Radius Radius Radius Figure 5 12 Example of Login Attempt and Primary Secondary Authentication Information from the Show Authentication Command ProCurve config show radius authentication Status and Counters RADIUS Authentication Information NAS Identifier HPswitch Invalid Server Addresses UDP Server IP Addr Port Timeouts Requests Challenges Accepts Rejects 192 33 12 65 1812 0 Figure 5 13 Example of RADIUS Authentication Information from a Specific Server 5 28 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Viewing RADIUS Statistics RADIUS Accounting Statistics Syntax show accounting Lists configured accounting interval Empty User suppres sion status accounting types methods and modes show radius accounting Lists accounting statistics for the RADIUS server s config ured in the switch using the radius server host command show accounting sessions Lists the accounting sessions currently active on the switch ProCurve show accounting Status and Counters Accounting Information Interval min 5 Suppress Empty User
212. ized 8 20 unauthorized client VLAN defined 8 8 unauth vid 8 22 VLAN unauthorized client different ports 8 34 untagged 8 27 Index 1 VLAN use multiple clients 8 7 A aaa authentication 4 8 aaa port access See Web or MAC Authentication access levels authorized IP managers 10 3 accounting See RADIUS address authorized for port security 9 3 authentication See TACACS authorized addresses for IP management security 10 4 for port security 9 3 authorized IP managers access levels 10 3 building IP masks 10 9 configuring in browser interface 10 7 10 9 configuring in console 10 5 definitions of single and multiple 10 4 effect of duplicate IP addresses 10 12 IP mask for multiple stations 10 10 IP mask for single station 10 9 IP mask operation 10 4 operating notes 10 12 overview 10 1 precedence over other security 10 2 troubleshooting 10 12 C certificate CA signed 7 4 root 7 4 self signed 7 4 Clear button to delete password protection 2 5 configuration port security 9 5 RADIUS See RADIUS SSH See SSH connection inactivity time 2 3 2 Index console for configuring authorized IP managers 10 5 D DES 6 3 7 3 disclaimer 1 ii duplicate IP address effect on authorized IP managers 10 12 E event log intrusion alerts 9 24 G guest VLAN 8 7 8 8 GVRP
213. knowledgment The system option page 5 22 always delivers stop only operation because the switch sends the accumulated data only when there is areboot reload or accounting on off event Syntax no aaa accounting lt exec network system gt lt start stop stop only gt radius Configures RADIUS accounting type and how data will be sent to the RADIUS server For example to configure RADIUS accounting on the switch with start stop for exec functions and stop only for system functions ProCurve config aaa accounting exec start stop radius ee Configures exec and system ProCurve config aaa accounting system stop only radius accounting and controls Status and Counters Accounting Information Intervalimin 0 Suppress Empty User No Summarizes the switch s accounting configuration Method Mode Network None Exec and System accounting are Exec Radius Start Stop active Assumes the switch is System Radius Stop Only configured to access a reachable Figure 5 8 Example of Configuring Accounting Types 5 23 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Configuring RADIUS Accounting 3 Optional Configure Session Blocking and Interim Updating Options These optional parameters give you additional control over accounting data Updates In addition to using a Start Stop or Stop Only trigger you can optionally configure the switch to send periodic accounting record updates to a RADIUS server
214. ks inbound and outbound traffic and restarts the 802 1X authentication process Affects only ports configured as 802 1X supplicants clear statistics Clears and restarts the 802 1X supplicant statistics counters 8 46 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Displaying 802 1X Configuration Statistics and Counters Displaying 802 1X Configuration Statistics and Counters 802 1X Authentication Commands page 8 17 802 1X Supplicant Commands page 8 42 802 1X Open VLAN Mode Commands page 8 26 802 1X Related Show Commands show port access authenticator below show port access supplicant page 8 53 Details of 802 1X Mode Status Listings page 8 50 RADIUS server configuration pages 8 24 Show Commands for Port Access Authenticator Syntax show port access authenticator e lt port list gt config statistics session counters e Without lt port list gt config statistics session counters displays whether port access authenticator is active Yes or No and the status of all ports configured for 802 1X authentication The Authenticator Backend State in this data refers to the switch s interaction with the authentication server e With lt port list gt only same as above but limits port status to only the specified port Does not display data for a specified port that is not enabled as an authenticator e With lt port list gt config statistics session counters di
215. lay the switch s public key with the show crypto host public key command figure 6 6 2 Bring up the SSH client s known host file in a text editor such as Notepad as straight ASCII text and copy the switch s public key into the file 3 Ensure that there are no changes in breaks in the text string A public key must be an unbroken ASCII string Line breaks are not allowed Changes in the line breaks will corrupt the Key For example if you are using Windows Notepad ensure that Word Wrap in the Edit menu is disabled and that the key text appears on a single line ELEGE olx Fie Edit Search Help 896 35 42719947 6766 677426366625 66 85 79924214851527933248 752 021855126493293480754607 6478286 64329 4 HZ Figure 6 8 Example of a Correctly Formatted Public Key 6 13 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Configuring the Switch for SSH Operation 4 Addany data required by your SSH client application For example Before saving the key to an SSH client s known hosts file you may have to insert the switch s IP address z Notepad Of x File Edit Search Help 16 28 17 169 896 35 427199476766 677426366625 66 65 79924214851527933248752621855126493293407546 Inserted Exponent lt e gt Modulus lt n gt IP Address Figure 6 9 Example of a Switch Public Key Edited To Include the Switch s IP Address For more on this topic refer to the documentation provided with your SSH client application Dis
216. le LACP active or passive 9 26 Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Configuring Protected Ports Configuring Protected Ports There are situations where you want to provide internet access to users but prevent them from accessing each other To achieve this control you can use the protected ports command The command applies per port and filters the outbound traffic from a port This allows the configuration of two port groups on a switch protected ports and unprotected ports The ports have these characteristics m Traffic from protected ports is not forwarded to other protected ports Protected ports can communicate with unprotected ports but not with each other Unprotected ports can communicate with all ports The protected ports command applies to logical ports trunks as well as untrunked ports Syntax no protected ports lt port list gt Prevents the selected ports from communicating with each other Default All ports unprotected no protected ports all Clears the protection from all ports all ports can now com municate with each other ProCurve config protected ports 4 5 Figure 9 15 Example of Protected Ports Command for Ports 4 and 5 To display information about which ports have been configured as protected ports enter this command ProCurve config show protected ports 9 27 Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Configuring Protected Ports ProCurve config s
217. licant A and assigns this supplicant to VLAN 50 then the port can access VLAN 50 as an untagged member while the client session is running When the client disconnects from the port then the port drops these assignments and uses the untagged VLAN memberships for which it is statically configured After client authentication the port resumes any tagged VLAN memberships for which it is already configured For details refer to the Note on page 8 28 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X 802 1X Open VLAN Mode Condition Rule Temporary VLAN Membership During Port membership in a VLAN assigned to operate as the a Client Session Effect of Unauthorized Client VLAN session on untagged port VLAN membership Effect of Authorized Client VLAN session on untagged port VLAN membership Multiple Authenticator Ports Using the Same Unauthorized Client and Authorized Client VLANs Effect of Failed Client Authentication Attempt Unauthorized Client VLAN is temporary and ends when the client receives authentication or the client disconnects from the port whichever is first e Port membership ina VLAN assigned to operate as the Authorized Client VLAN is also temporary and ends when the client disconnects from the port If a VLAN assignment from a RADIUS server is used instead the same rule applies e When an unauthenticated client connects to a port that is already configured with a static untagg
218. lication you use for client public key authentication with the switch must have the capability export public keys The switch can accept keys in the PEM Encoded ASCII Format or in the Non Encoded ASCII format Pub Key Gen 21 Dec 2661 12 61 A1B3Nz1y2 orENYL Q8D8qDMiozuic End of Pub Key r S Beginning of actual SSHv2 Comment describing public public key in PEM Encoded key identity ASCII format Figure 6 3 Example of Public Key in PEM Encoded ASCII Format Common for SSHv2 Clients 512 37 781933603392 6195457933218459145 68115859448 679486918367 079 6682185894437 76362626267 ca Bit Exponent lt e gt Modulus lt n gt Figure 6 4 Example of Public Key in Non Encoded ASCII Format Common for SSHv1 Client Applications 6 5 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Steps for Configuring and Using SSH for Switch and Client Authentication Steps for Configuring and Using SSH for Switch and Client Authentication For two way authentication between the switch and an SSH client you must use the login Operator level Table 6 1 SSH Options Switch Primary SSH Authenticate Authenticate Primary Switch Secondary Switch Access Authentication Switch Public Key Client Public Key Password Password Level to SSH Clients to the Switch Authentication Authentication Operator ssh login rsa Yes Yes No local or none Login ssh login Local Yes No Yes none Level ssh login TACACS Yes No Yes local or none ssh login
219. lists the switch s port status which indicates an intrusion alert on port Al ProCurve show interfaces brief Intrusion Alert on port A1 Status and Counters Port Status Intrusion Enab ed Status Mode 10 100Tx 10 100Tx 10 100Tx 10 100Tx Figure 9 11 Example of an Unacknowledged Intrusion Alert in a Port Status Display If you wanted to see the details of the intrusion you would then enter the show port security intrusion log command For example 9 22 Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Reading Intrusion Alerts and Resetting Alert Flags ProCurve show port security intrusion log MAC Address of latest Dates and Times of Intruder on Port A1 Status and Counters Intrusion Log Intrusions Port MAC Address Date Time ras Earlier intrusi eS ran ee ee ee ae P RE ade Ree al oso0009 e93d4 07 03 02 21 09 34 cleared that is the Alert a thE ge 07 03 02 17 26 27 Flag has been reset at 080009 e93d4f prior to 07 03 02 17 18 43 least twice before the most recent intrusion occurred Figure 9 12 Example of the Intrusion Log with Multiple Entries for the Same Port The above example shows three intrusions for port Al Since the switch can show only one uncleared intrusion per port the older two intrusions in this example have already been cleared by earlier use of the clear intrusion log or the port security lt port list gt clear intrusion flag command The intrusion log holds up t
220. mal commands for configuring a RADIUS server to support Web Auth and MAC Auth For information on other RADIUS command options refer to chapter 5 RADIUS Authentication and Account ing Syntax no radius server host lt ip address gt Adds a server to the RADIUS configuration or with no deletes a server from the configuration You can config ure up to three RADIUS server addresses The switch uses the first server it successfully accesses Refer to RADIUS Authentication and Accounting on page 5 1 key lt global key string gt Specifies the global encryption key the switch uses with servers for which the switch does not have a server specific key assignment below This key is optional if all RADIUS server addresses configured in the switch include a server specific encryption key Default Null Web and MAC Authentication Configuring the Switch To Access a RADIUS Server Syntax radius server host lt ip address gt key lt server specific key string gt no radius server host lt ip address gt key Optional Specifies an encryption key for use during authentication or accounting sessions with the speci fied server This key must match the encryption key used on the RADIUS server Use this command only if the specified server requires a different encryption key than configured for the global encryption key above The no form of the command removes the key configured for a s
221. mand Options and Operation Using the CLI To Display Port Security Settings Syntax show port security show port security e lt port number gt show port security e lt port number gt lt port number lt port number gt Without port parameters show port security displays operating control settings for all ports on a switch For example ProCurve config show port security Port Security Port Learn Mode Action Static Static Static Static Static Static Continuous Continuous Alarm Disable Port Alarm Disable Port Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm oaTanuor UNF Figure 9 2 Example Port Security Listing Ports A7 and A8 Show the Default Setting With port numbers included in the command show port security displays Learn Mode Address Limit alarm Action and Authorized Addresses for the spec ified ports on a switch The following example lists the full port security configuration for a single port ProCurve config show port security A3 Port Security Port A3 Learn Mode Continuous Static Address Limit 1 Action None Send Alarm Authorized Addresses 00906d fdecOO Figure 9 3 Example of the Port Security Configuration Display for a Single Port 9 11 Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Port Security Command Options and Operation The following command example shows the option for entering a range of ports including a series of non contiguous ports Note that no space
222. mit no 8 19 control all clients 8 13 convert to port based 8 19 displaying 802 1X port configuration 8 49 multiple clients same VLAN 8 4 open port 8 4 open VLAN status 8 49 overview 8 3 port based enable 8 42 return to 8 18 See also client based unauthorized client risk 8 5 port security use 8 5 RADIUS 8 3 unauthorized Client VLAN multiple clients 8 33 VLAN unauthorized client best use 8 33 untagged 8 27 untagged membership 8 19 802 1x access control authenticate users 8 5 authenticator 8 18 unblock port 8 5 authorized client VLAN defined 8 7 auth vid 8 22 auto 8 20 clear statistics 8 25 control command 8 20 EAPOL 8 8 force authorized 8 20 force unauthorized 8 20 guest VLAN 8 7 8 8 initialize 8 25 logoff period 8 22 max requests 8 21 MD5 8 7 port based access 8 4 client without authentication 8 5 enable 8 18 latest client effect 8 5 multiple client access 8 5 multiple clients authenticating 8 5 no client limit 8 4 open port 8 4 operation 8 5 recommended use 8 5 single client authenticates 8 5 tagged VLAN membership 8 5 untagged VLAN membership 8 5 8 27 quiet period 8 21 reauthenticate 8 25 reauth period 8 22 server timeout 8 21 supplicant timeout 8 21 terminology 8 7 tx period 8 21 unauthor
223. municate with the RADIUS server you have configured to support MAC Auth on the switch 4 Configure the switch with the correct IP address and encryption key to access the RADIUS server 5 Configure the switch for MAC Auth a Configure MAC Authentication on the switch ports you want to use 6 Test both the authorized and unauthorized access to your system to ensure that MAC Authentication works properly on the ports you have configured for port access 3 22 Web and MAC Authentication Configuring MAC Authentication on the Switch Configure the Switch for MAC Based Authentication Command Page Configuration Level aaa port access mac based addr format 3 23 no aaa port access mac based e lt port list gt 3 23 addr limit 3 24 addr moves 3 24 auth vid 3 24 logoff period 3 24 max requests 3 24 quiet period 3 25 reauth period 3 25 reauthenticate 3 25 server timeout 3 25 unauth vid 3 25 Syntax aaa port access mac based addr format lt no delimiterlsingle dash multi dash multi colon gt Specifies the MAC address format to be used in the RADIUS request message This format must match the format used to store the MAC addresses in the RADIUS server Default no delimiter no delimiter specifies an aabbccddeeff format single dash specifies an aabbcc ddeeff format multi dash specifies an aa bb cc dd ee ff format multi colon specifies an aa bb cc dd ee ff format Syntax
224. must first configure the switch for SSH operation Refer to Configuring Secure Shell SSH on page 6 1 m Web Web browser interface You can also use RADIUS for Port Based Access authentication Refer to Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X on page 8 1 You can configure RADIUS as the primary password authentication method for the above access methods You will also need to select either local or none as a secondary or backup method Note that for console access if you configure radius or tacacs for primary authentication you must configure local for the secondary method This prevents the possibility of being com pletely locked out of the switch in the event that all primary access methods fail 5 8 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Configuring the Switch for RADIUS Authentication Syntax aaa authentication lt console telnet ssh web gt lt enable login gt lt radius gt Configures RADIUS as the primary password authentication method for console Telnet SSH and or the Web browser interface The default primary lt enable login gt authentication is local k local none gt Provides options for secondary authentication default none Note that for console access secondary authenti cation must be local if primary access is not local This prevents you from being completely locked out of the switch in the event of a failure in other access methods
225. n 8 26 mode 8 26 operating notes 8 38 operating rules 8 31 PVID no 8 50 security breach 8 38 set up 8 34 status viewing 8 50 suspended VLAN 8 51 unauthorized client 8 28 use models 8 28 VLAN after authentication 8 28 8 32 8 39 VLAN tagged 8 26 8 28 8 29 8 32 8 38 8 39 8 52 operation 8 10 port security with 802 1X 8 40 RADIUS host IP address 8 24 rules of operation 8 12 See 802 1x access control show commands 8 47 show commands supplicant 8 53 statistics 8 47 supplicant operation 8 12 supplicant operation switch port 8 11 supplicant state 8 53 supplicant statistics note 8 53 supplicant configuring 8 42 supplicant configuring switch port 8 44 supplicant enabling 8 44 switch username and password 8 4 troubleshooting gvrp 8 54 used with port security 8 40 VLAN operation 8 54 ports protected 9 27 prior to 9 21 9 23 9 25 Privacy Enhanced Mode PEM See SSH protected ports 9 27 configuring 9 27 logical ports 9 27 4 Index show 9 27 show running config 9 28 proxy web server 9 25 Q quick start 1 8 R RADIUS accounting 5 2 5 17 accounting configuration outline 5 19 accounting configure server access 5 20 accounting configure types on switch 5 22 accounting exec 5 18 5 22 accounting interim updating
226. n fails and the length of time between authentication requests Syntax show port access port list mac based config detail Shows all MAC Authentication settings including the Radius server specific settings for the specified ports 3 29 Web and MAC Authentication Show Client Status Show Client Status The table below shows the possible client status information that may be reported by a Web based or MAC based show clients command Reported Status authenticated authenticating rejected no vlan rejected unauth vian timed out no vlan timed out unauth vlan unauthenticated Available Network Connection Authorized VLAN Switch only No network access Unauthorized VLAN only 1 2 No network access Unauthorized VLAN only Switch only Possible Explanations Client authenticated Remains connected until logoff period or reauth period expires Pending RADIUS request Invalid credentials supplied RADIUS Server difficulties See log file If unauth vid is specified it cannot be successfully applied to the port An authorized client on the port has precedence Invalid credentials supplied RADIUS Server difficulties See log file RADIUS request timed out If unauth vid is specified it cannot be successfully applied to the port An authorized client on the port has precedence Credentials resubmitted after quiet period expires RADIUS request timed out A
227. n of the switch server certificate up to the root certificate installed in the browser thus authenticating the switch unequivocally As long as you are confident that an unauthorized device is not using the switch s IP address in an attempt to gain access to your data or network you can accept the connection When an SSL client connects to the switch for the first time it is possible for a man in the middle attack that is for an unauthorized device to pose undetected as the switch and learn the usernames and passwords controlling access to the switch When using self signed certificates with the switch there is a possibility for a man in the middle attack when connecting for the first time that is an unauthorized device could pose undetected as a switch and learn the usernames and passwords controlling access to the switch Use caution when connecting for the first time to a switch using self signed certificates Before accepting the certificate closely verify the contents of the certificate see browser documentation for additional information on viewing contents of certificate The security concern described above does not exist when using CA signed certificates that have been generated by certificate authorities that the web browser already trusts 7 18 Configuring Secure Socket Layer SSL General Operating Rules and Notes Using the CLI interface to enable SSL Syntax no web management ssl Enables or disabl
228. n selects the manager public keys The operator option selects operator public keys The keylist str option allows you to select keys to display a comma delimited list The babble option converts the key data to phonetic hashes that are easier for visual comparisons The fingerprint option converts the key data to hexadec imal hashes that are for the same purpose 6 26 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Further Information on SSH Client Public Key Authentication For example if you wanted to copy aclient public key file named clientkeys txt from a TFTP server at 10 38 252 195 and then display the file contents ProCurve config copy tftp pub key file 10 38 252 195 Clientkeys txt ProCurve config show crypto client public key Maden name 1024 bit rsa Jamie_wilson Jamiewilson Thu Nov 07 2002 21 25 4 2M ssh rsa AAAABSNzaClyc2EAAAsDANABAAAAGOCZIONE qxMHUFEC6ErSulSa4vUhlEFznFhQqmgP2 PENR LQOUMAC tr FU QD LIE CM YM9FrN XvZH EIxTdEcSexFX S10tcRaFY zI9Uj K80dBMqvBGKB CV wlqdAgbk aEX3d WaPS2xarLCFHsTZhnCvQTZDOGABLErlcw 68 bit rsa Jamie _wilsonf Jamiewilson Mon Dec 16 2002 23 01 51 ssh rsa zaClyc2EAAAADANABAAAAYODOtmzA32Z70BgeuFINOLXI3Sb ooPKZ097KCPQcxKEVE 7N eKf 9M0X w fpqhlvsE66n 8FDu7W B2tKH tqQL Fox 7Gi cxNGhbind pqsauEym sEnclGu LgaNodaM Key Index Number Figure 6 15 Example of Copying and Displaying a Client Public Key File Containing Two Client Public Keys Replacing or Clearing the Public Key File
229. nd Counters General RADIUS Information Deadtime min O Timeout secs 5 Retransmit Attempts 5 Global Encryption Key Adds the new RADIUS server with its required source0119 key new RADIUS server configuration Compare this with Server IP Addr Encryption Key 10 33 18 127 sourceOl127 10 33 158 119 sourceOiig oe Seen ee l Auth Lists the switch s al Figure 5 4 Sample Configuration for RADIUS Server After Changing the Key and Adding Another Server To change the order in which the switch accesses RADIUS servers refer to Changing RADIUS Server Access Order on page 5 30 5 11 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Configuring the Switch for RADIUS Authentication 3 Configure the Switch s Global RADIUS Parameters You can configure the switch for the following global RADIUS parameters Number of login attempts In a given session specifies how many tries at entering the correct username and password pair are allowed before access is denied and the session terminated This is a general aaa authentication parameter and is not specific to RADIUS Global server key The server key the switch will use for contacts with all RADIUS servers for which there is not a server specific key configured by radius server host lt ip address gt key lt key string gt This key is optional if you configure a server specific key for each RADIUS server entered in the switch
230. nd if the portis statically configured as an untagged member of another VLAN the port s access to this other VLAN is restored Note If RADIUS authentication assigns a VLAN to the port this assignment overrides any statically configured untagged VLAN membership on the port while the client is connected If the port is statically configured as a tagged member of a VLAN that is not used by 802 1X Open VLAN mode the port returns to tagged membership in this VLAN upon successful client authentication This happens even if the RADIUS server assigns the portto another authorized VLAN Note that ifthe portis already configured as a tagged member of a VLAN that RADIUS assigns as an authorized VLAN then the port becomes an untagged member of that VLAN for the duration of the client connection After the client disconnects the port returns to tagged membership in that VLAN 8 30 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X 802 1X Open VLAN Mode Table 8 1 802 1X Open VLAN Mode Options 802 1X Per Port Configuration Port Response Open VLAN Mode with Only an Authorized Client VLAN Configured e Port automatically blocks a client that cannot initiate an authentication session e Ifthe client successfully completes an authentication session the port becomes an untagged member of this VLAN Note if RADIUS authentication assigns a VLAN the port temporarily becomes an untagged member of the RADIUS assig
231. ne primary and one secondary access method is allowed for each access type m Inthe ProCurve switch EAP RADIUS uses MD5 and TLS to encrypt a response to a challenge from a RADIUS server 5 4 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting General RADIUS Setup Procedure General RADIUS Setup Procedure Preparation 1 Configure one to three RADIUS servers to support the switch That is one primary server and one or two backups Refer to the documentation provided with the RADIUS server application 2 Before configuring the switch collect the information outlined below Table 5 1 Preparation for Configuring RADIUS on the Switch e Determine the access methods console Telnet Port Access 802 1X SSH and or web browser interface for which you want RADIUS as the primary authentication method Consider both Operator login and Manager enable levels as well as which secondary authentication methods to use local or none if the RADIUS authentication fails or does not respond ProCurve gt show authentication Status and Counters Authentication Information Login Attempts 3 Respect Privilege Disabled Console access requires Local as Login Login Enable Enable secondary method to Access Task Primary Secondary Primary Seconda prevent lockout if the primary RADIUS X access fails due to loss Console of RADIUS server Telnet Radius Radius access or other Port Access EapRadius problems with the server
232. nected to the port Access Control This state is controlled by the following port access command syntax ProCurve config aaa port access authenticator lt port ist gt control lt authorized auto unauthorized gt Auto Configures the port to allow network access to any connected device that supports 802 1X authentication and provides valid 802 1X credentials This is the default authenticator setting FA Configures the port for Force Authorized which allows access to any device connected to the port regardless of whether it meets 802 1X criteria You can still configure console Telnet or SSH security on the port FU Configures the port for Force Unauthorized which blocks access to any device connected to the port regardless of whether the device meets 802 1X criteria Authenticator State Connecting A client is connected to the port but has not received 802 1X authentication Force Unauth Indicates the Force Unauthorized state Blocks access to the network regardless of whether the client supports 802 1X authentication or provides 802 1X credentials Force Auth Indicates the Force Authorized state Grants access to any device connected to the port The device does not have to support 802 1X authentication or provide 802 1X credentials Authorized The device connected to the port supports 802 1X authentication has provided 802 1X credentials and has received access to the network
233. ned VLAN instead of the Authorized Client VLAN while the client is connected e f the portis statically configured as a tagged member of any other VLAN the port returns to tagged membership in this VLAN upon successful client authentication This happens even ifthe RADIUS server assigns the port to another authorized VLAN If the port is already configured as a tagged member of a VLAN that RADIUS assigns as an authorized VLAN then the port becomes an untagged member of that VLAN for the duration of the client connection After the client disconnects the port returns to tagged membership in that VLAN Operating Rules for Authorized Client and Unauthorized Client VLANs Condition Static VLANs used as Authorized Client or Unauthorized Client VLANs VLAN Assignment Received from a RADIUS Server These must be configured on the switch before you configure an 802 1X authenticator port to use them Use the vlan lt vian id gt command or the VLAN Menu screen in the Menu interface Ifthe RADIUS server specifies a VLAN for an authenticated supplicant connected to an 802 1X authenticator port this VLAN assignment overrides any Authorized Client VLAN assignment configured on the authenticator port This is because both VLANs are untagged and the switch allows only one untagged VLAN membership per port For example suppose you configured port A4 to place authenticated supplicants in VLAN 20 If a RADIUS server authenticates supp
234. nfigure the switch to temporarily assign autho rized and unauthorized VLAN memberships on a per port basis to provide different services and access to authenticated and unauthen ticated clients m Web pages for username and password entry and the display of authorization status are provided when using Web Authentication m You can use the RADIUS server to temporarily assign a port to a static VLAN to support an authenticated client When a RADIUS server authenticates a client the switch port membership during the client s connection is determined according to the following hierarchy 1 A RADIUS assigned VLAN 2 An authorized VLAN specified in the Web or MAC Auth configuration for the subject port 3 A static port based untagged VLAN to which the port is configured A RADIUS assigned VLAN has priority over switch port membership in any VLAN You can allow wireless clients to move between switch ports under Web MAC Authentication control Clients may move from one Web authorized port to another or from one MAC authorized port to another This capability allows wireless clients to move from one access point to another without having to reauthenticate m Unlike 802 1X operation clients do not need supplicant software for Web or MAC Authentication only a web browser for Web Authenti cation or a MAC address for MAC Authentication m You can use Show commands to display session status and port access conf
235. ng RADIUS Server Access Order 0 0000 e eee 5 30 Messages Related to RADIUS Operation 02 0 002 eee 5 32 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Contents secs eee ees od hs Ve Saas Ve Gace eae eas 6 1 QVGIVICW ore est ed Siege eis ER ees eee DUA A LS Ae Renae ead wears gt 6 2 Terminology dda sktine ese ete Oe DEAR eR ae RS AOA Re ae eS 6 4 Prerequisite for Using SSH 2 0 0c cece cece eee 6 5 Public Key Formats lt 25 22 094404 904 Tirua DEE RE EE AE weed 6 5 Steps for Configuring and Using SSH for Switch and Client Authentication 00 02 e eee eee 6 6 General Operating Rules and Notes 0 00 eee cece eee 6 8 Configuring the Switch for SSH Operation 0 0005 6 9 1 Assign Local Login Operator and Enable Manager Password 6 9 2 Generate the Switch s Public and Private Key Pair 6 10 3 Provide the Switch s Public Key to Clients 6 12 4 Enable SSH on the Switch and Anticipate SSH Client Contact Behavior 0 0 c eee eee eee eee 6 15 5 Configure the Switch for SSH Authentication 6 18 6 Use an SSH Client To Access the Switch 0 6 22 Further Information on SSH Client Public Key Authentication 6 23 Messages Related to SSH Operation 0000 e eee eee 6 29 Configuring Secure Socket Layer SSL Contents daana aa Hed tah wis tg Meet 4a bee A ead 7 1
236. ng a session reauthenticate An implicit logoff period can be set if there is no activity from the client after a given amount of time logoff period In addition a session ends if the link on the port is lost requiring reauthenti cation of all clients Also if a client moves from one port to another and client 3 6 Web and MAC Authentication How Web and MAC Authentication Operate moves have not been enabled client moves on the ports the session ends and the client must reauthenticate for network access At the end of the session the port returns to its pre authentication state Any changes to the port s VLAN memberships made while it is an authorized port take affect at the end of the session A client may not be authenticated due to invalid credentials or a RADIUS server timeout The max retries parameter specifies how many times a client may enter his credentials before authentication fails The server timeout parameter sets how long the switch waits to receive a response from the RADIUS server before timing out The max requests parameter specifies how many authentication attempts may result ina RADIUS server timeout before authentication fails The switch waits a specified amount of time quiet period before processing any new authentication requests from the client Network administrators may assign unauthenticated clients to a specific static untagged VLAN unauth vid to provide access to specific guest network resou
237. ngs to a tagged VLAN used for 1 or 2 above then it operates as an untagged member of that VLAN while the client is connected When the client disconnects the port reverts to tagged membership in the VLAN Use Models for 802 1X Open VLAN Modes You can apply the 802 1X Open VLAN mode in more than one way Depending on your use you will need to create one or two static VLANs on the switch for exclusive use by per port 802 1X Open VLAN mode authentication Unauthorized Client VLAN Configure this VLAN when unauthen ticated friendly clients will need access to some services before being authenticated Authorized Client VLAN Configure this VLAN for authenticated clients when the port is not statically configured as an untagged member of a VLAN you want clients to use or when the port is statically configured as an untagged member of a VLAN you do not want clients to use A port can be configured as untagged on only one VLAN When an Authorized Client VLAN is configured it will always be untagged and will block the port from using a statically configured untagged membership in another VLAN Note that after client authentication the port returns to membership in any tagged VLANs for which you have configured it See the Note above 8 28 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X 802 1X Open VLAN Mode Table 8 1 802 1X Open VLAN Mode Options 802 1X Per Port Configuration No Open VLAN mode Port
238. nly ports that should belong to this VLAN are ports offering services and access you want available to authenticated clients 802 1X authen ticator ports do not have to be members of this VLAN Note that if an 802 1X authenticator port is an untagged member of another VLAN the port s access to that other VLAN will be temporarily removed while an authenticated client is connected to the port For example if i Port A5 is an untagged member of VLAN 1 the default VLAN ii You configure port A5 as an 802 1X authenticator port iii You configure port A5 to use an Authorized Client VLAN Then if a client connects to port A5 and is authenticated port A5 becomes an untagged member of the Authorized Client VLAN and is temporarily suspended from membership in the default VLAN If you expect friendly clients to connect without having 802 1X suppli cant software running provide a server on the Unauthorized Client VLAN for downloading 802 1X supplicant software to the client and a procedure by which the client initiates the download 8 34 Caution Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X 802 1X Open VLAN Mode A client must either have a valid IP address configured before connecting to the switch or download one through the Unauthorized Client VLAN from a DHCP server In the latter case you will need to provide DHCP services on the Unauthorized Client VLAN Ensure that the switch is connected to a RADIUS
239. no aaa port access mac based e lt port list gt Enables MAC based authentication on the specified ports Use the no form of the command to disable MAC based authentication on the specified ports Web and MAC Authentication Configuring MAC Authentication on the Switch Syntax aaa port access mac based e lt port list gt addr limit lt 1 2 gt Specifies the maximum number of authenticated MACs to allow on the port Default 1 Syntax no aaa port access mac based e lt port list gt addr moves Allows client moves between the specified ports under MAC Auth control When enabled the switch allows addresses to move without requiring a re authentica tion When disabled the switch does not allow moves and when one does occur the user will be forced to re authenticate At least two ports from port s and to port s must be specified Use the no form of the command to disable MAC address moves between ports under MAC Auth control Default disabled no moves allowed Syntax aaa port access mac based e lt port list gt auth vid lt vid gt no aaa port access mac based e lt port list gt auth vid Specifies the VLAN to use for an authorized client The Radius server can override the value accept response includes a vid If auth vid is 0 no VLAN changes occur unless the RADIUS server supplies one Use the no form of the command to set the auth vid to 0 Default 0 Syntax aaa port ac
240. nstead of having to rely on maintaining and distributing switch specific passwords to all users For accounting this can help you track network resource usage Authentication You can use RADIUS to verify user identity for the follow ing types of primary password access to the ProCurve switch m Serial port Console m Telnet m SSH m Web m Port Access The switch does not support RADIUS security for SNMP network manage ment access For information on blocking unauthorized access through the web browser interface refer to Controlling Web Browser Interface Access When Using RADIUS Authentication on page 5 17 Accounting RADIUS accounting on the switch collects resource consump tion data and forwards it to the RADIUS server This data can be used for trend analysis capacity planning billing auditing and cost analysis 5 2 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Terminology Terminology CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol A challenge response authentication protocol that uses the Message Digest 5 MD5 hashing scheme to encrypt a response to a challenge from a RADIUS server EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol A general PPP authentication protocol that supports multiple authentication mechanisms A specific authentication mechanism is known as an EAP type such as MD5 Challenge Generic Token Card and TLS Transport Level Security Host See RADIUS Server NAS Network Access Server
241. ntents OVGIVIEW gt ind cicke sheng he iene eta uaa Rb aad a gees wd tego 25 3 2 Client Options cs vrcasecssncgtee e e Ache ee Aaa Saas bah ae an eae 3 3 General Features 00 0 0 c cece een eee neee 3 4 How Web and MAC Authentication Operate 0005 3 5 Authenticator Operation 00 cee eect nnen 3 5 Terminology casi hh an aed Gs tre Od pine en epee 3 9 Operating Rules and Notes 2 00 e eee eee ence eee eee 3 10 General Setup Procedure for Web MAC Authentication 3 12 Do These Steps Before You Configure Web MAC Authentication 3 12 Additional Information for Configuring the RADIUS Server To Support MAC Authentication 0 00000 3 14 Configuring the Switch To Access a RADIUS Server 3 15 Configuring Web Authentication 00 cece eee eee 3 17 OVVIE W sh eins tt a nea Si bade tends ite Sake a LSE oe dd A oA OO 3 17 Configure the Switch for Web Based Authentication 3 18 Configuring MAC Authentication on the Switch 3 22 WV OCTVICW 2005 it Pak chk ale cls tee tA tect ME bee e A DR i Es Bll 3 22 Configure the Switch for MAC Based Authentication 3 23 Show Status and Configuration of Web Based Authentication 3 26 Show Status and Configuration of MAC Based Authentication 3 28 Show Client Status is penie ne p PEE A cence eens 3 30 3 1 Web and MAC Authentication Ove
242. nter a duplicate TACACS server IP address Operating Notes If you configure Authorized IP Managers on the switch it is not necessary to include any devices used as TACACS servers in the authorized manager list That is authentication traffic between a TACACS server and the switch is not subject to Authorized IP Manager controls configured on the switch Also the switch does not attempt TACACS authentication for a management station that the Authorized IP Manager list excludes because independent of TACACS the switch already denies access to such stations 4 25 TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Switch m When TACACS is not enabled on the switch or when the switch s only designated TACACS servers are not accessible setting a local Operator password without also setting a local Manager password does not protect the switch from manager level access by unautho rized persons 4 26 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Contents OV ETVIC Wi N EA tyes eek ct hao EO 8822 Bik ek tg E 5 2 Terminology merini inn Sheed ec ede se eee eae 5 3 Switch Operating Rules for RADIUS 0 00 c eee eee eee 5 4 General RADIUS Setup Procedure 0 0 c eee eee eee eee 5 5 Configuring the Switch for RADIUS Authentication 5 6 Outline of the Steps for Configuring RADIUS Authentication 5 7 1 Configure Authentication for the Access Methods You Want RADIUS To Protect
243. number of RADIUS Accounting Response packets which contained invalid authenticators received from this server The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this server on the accounting port The number of RADIUS packets which were received from this server on the accounting port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS Access Requests the switch has sent since it was last rebooted Does not include retransmissions The number of RADIUS Accounting Request packets sent This does not include retransmissions The number of RADIUS Access Challenge packets valid or invalid received from this server The number of RADIUS Access Accept packets valid or invalid received from this server The number of RADIUS Access Reject packets valid or invalid received from this server The number of RADIUS packets received on the accounting port from this server 5 27 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Viewing RADIUS Statistics RADIUS Authentication Statistics Syntax show authentication Displays the primary and secondary authentication meth ods configured for the Console Telnet Port Access 802 1X and SSH methods of accessing the switch Also displays the number of access attempts currently allowed in a session show radius authentication Displays NAS identifier and data on the configured RADIUS server and the switch s interactions with this server Requires prior use of the rad
244. o Configuring Multiple Stations Per Authorized Manager IP Entry on page 10 10 Figure 10 4 Example of Specifying an IP Authorized Manager with the Default Mask To Edit an Existing Manager Access Entry To change the mask or access level for an existing entry use the entry s IP address and enter the new value s Notice that any parameters not included in the command will be set to their default ProCurve config ip authorized managers 10 28 227 101 255 255 255 0 access operator The above command replaces the existing mask and access level for IP address 10 28 227 101 with 255 255 255 0 and operator The following command replaces the existing mask and access level for IP address 10 28 227 101 with 255 255 255 255 and manager the defaults because the command does not specify either of these parameters ProCurve config ip authorized managers 10 28 227 101 To Delete an Authorized Manager Entry This command uses the IP address of the authorized manager you want to delete ProCurve config no ip authorized managers 10 28 227 101 10 8 Using Authorized IP Managers Web Configuring IP Authorized Managers Web Configuring IP Authorized Managers In the web browser interface you can configure IP Authorized Managers as described below To Add Modify or Delete an IP Authorized Manager address 1 Click on the Security tab 2 Click on Authorized Addresses 3 Enter the appropriate parameter settings fo
245. o Configuration capabilities On the Operator level the configuration menus Download OS and Reboot Switch options in the Main Menu are not available Allows use of the ping link test show menu exit and logout commands plus the enable command if you can provide the Manager password Note Caution Configuring Username and Password Security Overview To configure password security 1 Set a Manager password pair and an Operator password pair if applica ble for your system 2 Exit from the current console session A Manager password pair will now be needed for full access to the console If you do steps 1 and 2 above then the next time a console session is started for either the menu interface or the CLI a prompt appears for a password Assuming you have protected both the Manager and Operator levels the level of access to the console interface will be determined by which password is entered in response to the prompt If you set a Manager password you may also want to configure the Inactivity Time parameter Refer to the Management and Configuration Guide for your switch This causes the console session to end after the specified period of inactivity thus giving you added security against unautho rized console access The manager and operator passwords and optional usernames control access to the menu interface CLI and web browser interface If you configure only a Manager password with no Operator pa
246. o 20 intrusion records and deletes intrusion records only when the log becomes full and new intrusions are subsequently added The prior to text in the record for the third intrusion means that a switch reset occurred at the indicated time and that the intrusion occurred prior to the reset To clear the intrusion from port Al and enable the switch to enter any subsequent intrusion for port A1 in the Intrusion Log execute the port security clear intrusion flag command If you then re display the port status screen you will see that the Intrusion Alert entry for port Al has changed to No Executing show port security intrusion log again will result in the same display as above and does not include the Intrusion Alert status ProCurve config port security al clear intrusion flag ProCurve config show interfaces brief Intrusion Alert on port A1 is now cleared Status and Counters Port Status Intrusion Port Al 10 100Tx A2 10 100Tx A3 10 100Tx Figure 9 13 Example of Port Status Screen After Alert Flags Reset For more on clearing intrusions see Note on Send Disable Operation on page 9 19 9 23 Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Reading Intrusion Alerts and Resetting Alert Flags Using the Event Log To Find Intrusion Alerts The Event Log lists port security intrusions as W MM DD YY HH MM SS FFI port A3 Security Violation where W is the severity level of the log ent
247. od encryption key and the IP addresses of the first choice and backup TACACS servers the switch can contact Syntax show tacacs For example if the switch was configured for a first choice and two backup TACACS server addresses the default timeout period and paris 1 for a global encryption key show tacacs would produce a listing similar to the following ProCurve show tacacs First Choice Status and Counters TACACS Information TACACS Server Timeout 5 Encryption Key paris 1 Second Choice Server IP Addr Opens Closes Aborts Errors Pkts Rx Pkts Tx TACACS Server 10 30 248 100 Third Choice Psat 10 30 248 156 TACACS Server 10 30 248 105 Figure 4 3 Example of the Switch s TACACS Configuration Listing 4 10 TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Switch Configuring the Switch s Authentication Methods The aaa authentication command configures the access control for console port and Telnet access to the switch That is for both access methods aaa authentication specifies whether to use a TACACS server or the switch s local authentication or for some secondary scenarios no authentication meaning that if the primary method fails authentication is denied This command also reconfigures the number of access attempts to allow in a session if the first attempt uses an incorrect username password pair Syntax aaa authentication lt console telnet gt Selects either console s
248. oing the switch s public private key pair renders the switch unable to engage in SSH operation and automatically disables IP SSH on the switch To verify whether SSH is enabled execute show ip ssh However any active SSH sessions will continue to run unless explicitly terminated with the CLI kill command To Generate or Erase the Switch s Public Private RSA Host Key Pair Because the host key pair is stored in flash instead of the running config file it is not necessary to use write memory to save the key pair Erasing the key pair automatically disables SSH Syntax crypto key generate ssh rsa Generates a public private key pair for the switch Ifa switch key pair already exists replaces it with a new key pair See the Note above crypto key zeroize ssh rsa Erases the switch s public private key pair and dis ables SSH operation show crypto host public key Displays switch s public key Displays the version 1 and version 2 views of the key babble Displays hashes of the switch s public key in phonetic format See Displaying the Public Key on page 6 14 fingerprint Displays fingerprints of the switch s public key in hexadecimal format See Displaying the Public Key on page 6 14 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Configuring the Switch for SSH Operation For example to generate and display a new key ProCurve config crypto key generate ssh rsa Host Public Installin
249. onnections to Other Switches on page 8 42 8 16 Note Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Configuring Switch Ports as 802 1X Authenticators Configuring Switch Ports as 802 1X Authenticators 802 1X Authentication Commands Page no aaa port access authenticator lt ethernet lt port list gt 8 17 control quiet period tx period client limit supplicant timeout 8 18 server timeout logoff period max requests reauth period auth vid unauth vid initialize reauthenticate clear statistics aaa authentication port access 8 23 lt local eap radius chap radius gt no aaa port access authenticator active 8 17 no port security ethernet lt port list gt learn mode port access 8 40 802 1X Open VLAN Mode Commands 8 26 802 1X Supplicant Commands 8 42 802 1X Related Show Commands 8 47 RADIUS server configuration 8 24 1 Enable 802 1X Authentication on Selected Ports This task configures the individual ports you want to operate as 802 1X authenticators for point to point links to 802 1X aware clients or switches and consists of two steps A Enable the selected ports as authenticators B Specify either client based or port based 802 1X authentication Actual 802 1X operation does not commence until you perform step 5 on page 8 15 to activate 802 1X authentication on the switch When you enable 802 1X authentication on a port the switch automatically
250. or a server response to an authentication request Depend ing on the current max requests value the switch sends anew attempt or ends the authentication session Default 30 seconds Syntax no aaa port access web based e lt port list gt ssl login Enables or disables SSL login https on port 443 SSL must be enabled on the switch If SSL login is enabled a user is redirected to a secure page where they enter their username and password If SSL login is disabled a user is not redirected to a secure page to enter their credentials Use the no form of the command to disable SSL login Default disabled Web and MAC Authentication Configuring MAC Authentication on the Switch Syntax aaa port access web based e lt port list gt unauth vid lt vid gt no aaa port access web based e lt port list gt unauth vid Specifies the VLAN to use for a client that fails authen tication If unauth vid is 0 no VLAN changes occur Use the no form of the command to set the unauth vid to 0 Default 0 Configuring MAC Authentication on the Switch Overview 1 Ifyouhave not already done so configure a local username and password pair on the switch 2 Ifyou plan to use multiple VLANs with MAC Authentication ensure that these VLANs are configured on the switch and that the appropriate port assignments have been made 3 Use the ping command in the switch console interface to ensure that the switch can com
251. or not For each port what security actions do you want The switch automatically blocks intruders detected on that port from transmit ting to the network You can configure the switch to 1 send intrusion alarms to an SNMP management station and to 2 option ally disable the port on which the intrusion was detected How do you want to learn of the security violation attempts the switch detects You can use one or more of these methods Through network management That is do you want an SNMP trap sent to a net management station when a port detects a security violation attempt Through the switch s Intrusion Log available through the CLI menu and web browser interface Through the Event Log in the menu interface or through the CLI show log command Use the CLI or web browser interface to configure port security operating and address controls The following table describes the parameters 9 5 Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Port Security Command Options and Operation Port Security Command Options and Operation Port Security Commands Used in This Section show port security 9 11 port security 9 12 lt ethernet port list gt 9 12 learn mode 9 12 address limit 9 12 mac address 9 12 action 9 12 clear intrusion flag 9 12 no port security 9 12 This section describes the CLI port security command and how the switch acquires and maintains authorized addresses Note
252. orts in lt port list gt If a port currently has no authenticated client sessions the next authenticated client session the port accepts determines the untagged VLAN membership to which the port is assigned during the session If another client session begins later on the same port while an earlier session is active the later session will be on the same untagged VLAN membership as the earlier session 8 18 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Configuring Switch Ports as 802 1X Authenticators Port Based 802 1X Authentication no aaa port access authenticator client limit Used to convert a port from client based authentication to port based authentication which is the default setting for ports on which authentication is enabled Executing aaa port access authenticator lt port list gt enables 802 1X authenti cation on lt port list gt and enables port based authentica tion page 8 17 Ifa port currently has no authenticated client sessions the next authenticated client session the port accepts determines the untagged VLAN membership to which the port is assigned during the session If another authenticated client session begins later on the same port while an earlier session is active the later session replaces the currently active session and will be on the untagged VLAN membership specified by the RADIUS server for the later session Example Configuring Client Based 802 1X Authentication
253. ou configure only the minimum feature set required by the TACACS application to provide service in your network environment After you have success with the minimum feature set you may then want to try additional features that the application offers Ensure that the switch has the correct local username and password for Manager access If the switch cannot find any designated TACACS servers the local manager and operator username password pairs are always used as the secondary access control method You should ensure that the switch has a local Manager password Other wise if authentication through a TACACS server fails for any reason then unauthorized access will be available through the console port or Telnet Using a terminal device connected to the switch s console port configure the switch for TACACS authentication only for telnet login access and telnet enable access At this stage do not configure TACACS authenti cation for console access to the switch as you may need to use the console for access if the configuration for the Telnet method needs debugging Ensure that the switch is configured to operate on your network and can communicate with your first choice TACACS server At a minimum this requires IP addressing and a successful ping test from the switch to the server On a remote terminal device use Telnet to attempt to access the switch If the attempt fails use the console access to check the TACACS conf
254. ou will see a prompt for both a local username and a local password during local authentication 4 22 Note TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Switch Using the Encryption Key General Operation 9 e When used the encryption key sometimes termed key secret key or secret helps to prevent unauthorized intruders on the network from reading username and password information in TACACS packets moving between the switch and a TACACS server At the TACACS server a key may include both of the following m Global key A general key assignment in the TACACS server appli cation that applies to all TACACS aware devices for which an indi vidual key has not been configured m Server Specific key A unique key assignment in the TACACS server application that applies to a specific TACACS aware device Configure a key in the switch only if the TACACS server application has this exact same key configured for the switch That is if the key parameter in switch X does not exactly match the key setting for switch X in the TACACS server application then communication between the switch and the TACACS server will fail Thus on the TACACS server side you have a choice as to how to implement a key On the switch side it is necessary only to enter the key parameter so that it exactly matches its counterpart in the server For information on how to configure a general or individual key in t
255. ou will be prompted for a local password If you enter the switch s local Manager password or if there is no local Manager password configured in the switch you can bypass the TACACS server authentication for Telnet Enable Primary and go directly to read write Man ager access Thus for either the Telnet or console access method configuring Login Primary for Local authentication while configuring Enable Primary for TACACS authentication is not recommended as it defeats the purpose of using the TACACS authentication If you want Enable Primary log in attempts to go to a TACACS server then you should configure both Login Primary and Enable Primary for Tacacs authentication instead of configuring Login Primary to Local authentication 4 13 TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Switch For example here is a set of access options and the corresponding commands to configure them Console Login Operator or Read Only Access Primary using TACACS server Secondary using Local ProCurve config aaa authentication console login tacacs local Console Enable Manager or Read Write Access Primary using TACACS server Secondary using Local ProCurve config aaa authentication console enable tacacs local Telnet Login Operator or Read Only Access Primary using TACACS server Secondary using Local ProCurve config aaa authentication Telnet login tacacs local Telnet Enable Manager or Read Write Access
256. ound Use crypto key generate ssh rsa to create new host key The switch s key is missing or corrupt Use the crypto key generate ssh rsa command to generate a new key for the switch 6 30 Configuring Secure Socket Layer SSL Contents QV EL VICW occ Se detec ee tery a OEE wlan boned thle E od nce stlera gee aay 7 2 Terminology 324s etait de cies hee a eh eaten ond nee we aes 7 3 Prerequisite for Using SSL 2 2 ec eee 7 5 Steps for Configuring and Using SSL for Switch and Client Authentication 0 0 cece eee eee 7 5 General Operating Rules and Notes 0 0 eee eee ee ee 7 6 1 Assign Local Login Operator and Enable Manager Password 7 7 2 Generate the Switch s Server Host Certificate 7 8 3 Enable SSL on the Switch and Anticipate SSL Browser Contact Behavior 0 0 eee eee eee eens 7 17 Common Errors in SSL Setup 00 00 cece eee eee eee 7 21 7 1 Configuring Secure Socket Layer SSL Overview Note Note Overview Feature Default Menu CLI Web Generating a Self Signed Certificate on the switch No n a page 7 8 page 7 12 Generating a Certificate Request on the switch No n a n a page 7 15 Enabling SSL Disabled n a page 7 17 page 7 19 The ProCurve switches covered by this manual use Secure Socket Layer Version 3 SSLv3 and support for Transport Layer Security TLSv1 to provide remote web access to the switches v
257. our 802 1X configuration ProCurve recommends that you use a local username and password pair at least until your other security measures are in place Determine which ports on the switch you want to operate as authentica tors and or supplicants and disable LACP on these ports See the Note on 802 1X and LACP on page 8 13 Determine whether to use client based access control or port based access control Determine whether to use the optional 802 1X Open VLAN mode for clients that are not 802 1X aware that is for clients that are not running 802 1X supplicant software This will require you to provide download able software that the client can use to enable an authentication session For more on this topic refer to 802 1X Open VLAN Mode on page 8 26 For each port you want to operate as a supplicant determine a username and password pair You can either use the same pair for each port or use unique pairs for individual ports or subgroups of ports This can also be the same local username password pair that you assign to the switch Unless you are using only the switch s local username and password for 802 1X authentication configure at least one RADIUS server to authenti cate access requests coming through the ports on the switch from external supplicants including switch ports operating as 802 1X supplicants You can use up to three RADIUS servers for authentication one primary and two backups Refer to the do
258. output and table 8 3 describes the data that this command displays Figure 8 9 shows related VLAN data that can help you to see how the switch is using statically configured VLANs to support 802 1X operation ProCurve config show port access authenticator bi b4 An Unauth VLAN ID appearing in the Current VLAN ID column for the same port indicates an unauthenticated client is Port Access Authenticator Status connected to this port Assumes that the port is not a statically Port thenti t ti ted N Me i 4 ort access authenticator activated No es Gouigdranimienber o VLAN 10 Access Authenticator Authenticator Unauth Current Port Status Control State Backend State VLAN ID VLAN JD VLAN ID Ei Closed Auto Connecting Idle oe et B2 Open Auto gt Idle B3 Closed uto Connecting Idle B4 Closed auto Disconnected Idle No PVID Items 1 through 3 indicate that an authenticated client is f PER 3 connected to port B2 4 A 0 in the row for port B3 indicates there is no 1 0pen in the Status column Authorized VLAN configured for port B3 2 Authorized in the Authenticator State column 5 No PVID means there is currently no untagged 3 The Auth VLAN ID 101 is also in the Current VLAN ID VLAN ele rein part Eis column This assumes that the port is not a statically configured member of VLAN 101 Figure 8 8 Example Showing Ports Configured for Open VLAN Mode Thus in the show port access authenticator output m When the
259. owledge the earlier intrusion event by reset ting the alert flag The Intrusion Log lists the 20 most recently detected security violation attempts regardless of whether the alert flags for these attempts have been reset This gives you a history of past intrusion attempts Thus for example if there is an intrusion alert for port Al and the Intrusion Log shows two or more entries for port 1 only the most recent entry has not been acknowledged 9 18 Note on Send Disable Operation Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Reading Intrusion Alerts and Resetting Alert Flags by resetting the alert flag The other entries give you a history of past intrusions detected on port Al ProCurve show port security intrusion log Status and Counters Intrusion Log Port MAC Address Date Time 080009 e93d4 f 077 03 02 21 09 34 080009 21ae84 O7 03 02 17 26 27 080009 e93d4f prior to O7 03 02 17 18 43 Figure 9 8 Example of Multiple Intrusion Log Entries for the Same Port The log shows the most recent intrusion at the top of the listing You cannot delete Intrusion Log entries unless you reset the switch to its factory default configuration Instead if the log is filled when the switch detects a new intrusion the oldest entry is dropped off the listing and the newest entry appears at the top of the listing Keeping the Intrusion Log Current by Resetting Alert Flags When a violation occurs on a port an alert flag is se
260. passwords to the switch instead of to individuals who access the switch you must distribute the password information on each switch to everyone who needs to access the switch and you must configure and manage password protection on a per switch basis For more on local authentication refer to Configuring Username and Password Security on page 2 1 TACACS Authentication This method enables you to use a TACACS server in your network to assign a unique password user name and privilege level to each individual or group who needs access to one or more switches or other TACACS aware devices This allows you to administer primary authentication from a central server and to do so with more options than you have when using only local authentication You will still need to use local authentication as a backup if your TACACS servers become unavailable This means for example that you can use a central TACACS server to grant change or deny access to a specific individual on a specific switch instead of having to change local user name and password assignments on the switch itself and then have to notify other users of the change 4 4 Notes TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Switch General System Requirements To use TACACS authentication you need the following m A TACACS server application installed and configured on one or more servers or management stations in your network There are several TACAC
261. pecific server For example to configure the switch to access a RADIUS server at IP address 192 168 32 11 using a server specific shared secret key of 2Pz022 ProCurve config radius server host 192 168 32 11 key 2Pz022 ProCurve config show radius Status and Counters General RADIUS Information Deadtime min 0 Timeout secs 5 Retransmit Attempts Global Encryption Key Auth Server IP Addr Port Encryption Key 192 168 32 11 1812 1813 2Pz022 ProCurve config Figure 3 4 Example of Configuring a Switch To Access a RADIUS Server Note Web and MAC Authentication Configuring Web Authentication Configuring Web Authentication Overview 1 If you have not already done so configure a local username and password pair on the switch Identify or create a redirect URL for use by authenticated clients ProCurve recommends that you provide a redirect URL when using Web Authentication If a redirect URL is not specified web browser behavior following authentication may not be acceptable If you plan to use multiple VLANs with Web Authentication ensure that these VLANs are configured on the switch and that the appropriate port assignments have been made Also confirm that the VLAN used by authorized clients can access the redirect URL Use the ping command in the switch console interface to ensure that the switch can communicate with the RADIUS server you have configured to support Web Auth on the
262. playing the Public Key The switch provides three options for display ing its public key This is helpful if you need to visually verify that the public key the switch is using for authenticating itself to a client matches the copy of this key in the client s known hosts file Non encoded ASCII numeric string Requires a client ability to display the keys in the known hosts file in the ASCII format This method is tedious and error prone due to the length of the keys See figure 6 8 on page 6 13 Phonetic hash Outputs the key as a relatively short series of alpha betic character groups Requires a client ability to convert the key to this format m Hexadecimal hash Outputs the key as a relatively short series of hexadecimal numbers Requires a parallel client ability For example on the switch you would generate the phonetic and hexadecimal versions of the switch s public key in figure 6 8 as follows 6 14 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Configuring the Switch for SSH Operation Phonetic Hash of Switch s Public Ke xe y ProCurve config show crypto host public key babble 96 xozik kobaf daroh fygas byveb bymiz nupap povaz cesin kafec rixux host_sshl 896 xefes hikot kyher cukuz balah gezos qunym rezif horib cicyp poxyx Horadecimal host_ssh2 pub J Fingerprints of ProCurve config show crypto host public key fingerprint the Same Switch 96 53 00 14 75 72 84 90 cc c8 ba Se ca 92 fc c7 5c host_s
263. pplication timeout lt 1 255 gt 5 sec 1 255 sec Specifies how long the switch waits for a TACACS server to respond to an authentication request If the switch does not detect a response within the timeout period it initiates a new request to the next TACACS server in the list If all TACACS servers in the list fail to respond within the timeout period the switch uses either local authentication if configured or denies access if none configured for local authentication Adding Removing or Changing the Priority of a TACACS Server Suppose that the switch was already configured to use TACACS servers at 10 28 227 10 and 10 28 227 15 In this case 10 28 227 15 was entered first and so is listed as the first choice server ProCurve show tacacs Status and Counters TACACS Information Timeout 5 Encryption Key i First Choice TACACS Server Opens Closes Aborts Errors Pkts Rx Pkts Tx 10 268 227 10 Figure 4 4 Example of the Switch with Two TACACS Server Addresses Configured To move the first choice status from the 15 server to the 10 server use the no tacacs server host lt ip addr gt command to delete both servers then use tacacs server host lt ip addr gt to re enter the 10 server first then the 15 server The servers would then be listed with the new first choice server that is TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Switch The 10 server is no
264. prevent and log access attempts by unauthorized devices Authorized IP Managers page 10 1 Allows access to the switch by anetworked device having an IP address previously configured in the switch as authorized Management Access Security Protection In considering management access security for your switch there are two key areas to protect Unauthorized client access to switch management features Unauthorized client access to the network Table 1 1 on page 1 4 provides an overview of the type of protection offered by each switch security feature ProCurve recommends that you use local passwords together with your switch s other security features to provide a more comprehensive security fabric than if you use only local passwords 1 3 Getting Started Overview of Access Security Features Table 1 1 Management Access Security Protection Security Feature Offers Protection Against Unauthorized Client Access to Offers Protection Switch Management Features Against Connection Telnet SNMP Web ssH Unauthorized Client Net Mgmt Browser Client Access to the Network Local Manager and Operator PtP Yes No Yes Yes No Usernames and Passwords Remote Yes No Yes Yes No TACACS PtP Yes No No Yes No Remote Yes No No Yes No RADIUS PtP Yes No No Yes No Remote Yes No No Yes No SSH Ptp Yes No No Yes No Remote Yes No No Yes No SSL Ptp No No Yes No No Remote No No Yes No No Port Based Acces
265. pt those reserved for other purposes Examples of reserved IP ports are 23 Telnet and 80 http Some other reserved TCP ports on the ProCurve switches are 49 80 1506 and 1513 ProCurve config ip ssh roCurve config show ip ssh Enables SSH on the switch Lists the current SSH 33H Enabled configuration and status IP Port Number epg T t 7 3 Smee Ngee The switch uses these settings internally for transactions with clients See the Caution on page Protocol console telnet With SSH running the switch allows one ssh SSH v2 12 255 255 255 18 console session and up to three other sessions SSH and or Telnet Web browser sessions are inactive i Z also allowed but do not appear in the show ip ssh Figure 6 11 Example of Enabling IP SSH and Listing the SSH Configuration and Status 6 17 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Configuring the Switch for SSH Operation Caution Note Protect your private key file from access by anyone other than yourself If someone can access your private key file they can then penetrate SSH security on the switch by appearing to be you SSH does not protect the switch from unauthorized access via the web interface Telnet SNMP or the serial port While web and Telnet access can be restricted by the use of passwords local to the switch if you are unsure of the security this provides you may want to disable web based and or Telnet access no web man
266. r is enabled If it is disabled use the front panel security factory reset command to enable it 3 Press and release the Clear button on the front panel of the switch 4 Within 60 seconds of pressing the Clear button enter the following com mand no front panel security password recovery 5 Do one of the following after the CAUTION message appears e If you want to complete the command press Y for Yes e If you want to abort the command press N for No Figure 2 11 shows an example of disabling the password recovery parameter 2 16 Configuring Username and Password Security Front Panel Security ProCurve config no front panel security password recovery CAUTION xxx Disabling the clear button without password recovery prevents switch passwords from being reset If the switch password is lost restoring the default factory configuration will be required to regain access Continue with disabling password recovery y n y ProCurve config _ Figure 2 11 Example of the Steps for Disabling Password Recovery Password Recovery Process If you have lost the switch s manager username password but password recovery is enabled then you can use the Password Recovery Process to gain management access to the switch with an alternate password supplied by ProCurve Note If you have disabled password recovery which locks out the ability to recover a manager username password pair on th
267. r password You can use the factory reset command to prevent the Reset Clear combination from being used for this purpose Syntax no front panel security factory reset Disables or re enables the following functions associated with using the Reset Clear buttons in the combination described under Restoring the Factory Default Configuration on page 2 9 e Replacing the current startup config file with the factory default startup config file e Clearing any local usernames and passwords configured on the switch Default Both functions enabled Notes The Reset Clear button combination always reboots the switch regardless of whether the no form of the command has been used to disable the above two functions Also if you disable factory reset you cannot disable the password recovery option and the reverse Configuring Username and Password Security Front Panel Security The command to disable the factory reset operation produces this caution To complete the command press Y To abort the command press N ProCurve config no front panel security gaa CAUTION x22 Disabling the factory reset option prevents switch configuation and passwords from being easily reset or recovered Ensure that you are familiar with the front panel security options before proceeding Completes the command to y a disable the factory reset option Continue with disabling the factory reset option y n ProCurve conf
268. r the operation you want 4 Click on Add Replace or Delete to implement the configuration change For web based help on how to use the web browser interface screen click on the button provided on the web browser screen Building IP Masks The IP Mask parameter controls how the switch uses an Authorized Manager IP value to recognize the IP addresses of authorized manager stations on your network Configuring One Station Per Authorized Manager IP Entry This is the easiest way to apply a mask If you have ten or fewer management and or operator stations you can configure them quickly by simply adding the address of each to the Authorized Manager IP list with 255 255 255 255 for the corresponding mask For example as shown in Figure 10 3 on page 10 7 if you configure an IP address of 10 28 227 125 with an IP mask of 255 255 255 255 only a station with an IP address of 10 28 227 125 has management access to the switch Using Authorized IP Managers Building IP Masks Table 10 1 Analysis of IP Mask for Single Station Entries IP Mask 1st Octet 255 2nd 3rd 4th Manager Level or Operator Level Device Access Octet Octet Octet 255 255 255 The 255 in each octet of the mask specifies that only the exact value in Authorized Manager IP 10 28 that octet of the corresponding IP address is allowed This mask allows 227 125 management access only to a station having an IP address of 10 33 248 5
269. rated session key pair to negotiate an encryption method and session with an SSH client trying to connect to the switch The host key pair is stored in the switch s flash memory and only the public key in this pair is readable The public key should be added to a known hosts file for example SHOME ssh known_hosts on UNIX systems on the SSH clients which should have access to the switch Some SSH client appli cations automatically add the switch s public key to a known hosts file Other SSH applications require you to manually create a known hosts file and place the switch s public key in the file Refer to the documentation for your SSH client application The session key pair mentioned above is not visible on the switch It is a temporary internally generated pair used for a particular switch client ses sion and then discarded 6 10 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Configuring the Switch for SSH Operation Notes When you generate a host key pair on the switch the switch places the key pair in flash memory and not in the running config file Also the switch maintains the key pair across reboots including power cycles You should consider this key pair to be permanent that is avoid re generating the key pair without a compelling reason Otherwise you will have to re introduce the switch s public key on all management stations you have set up for SSH access to the switch using the earlier pair Removing zer
270. rce0127 These two servers will use the global encryption key Figure 5 6 Listings of Global RADIUS Parameters Configured In Figure 5 5 5 15 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Local Authentication Process Local Authentication Process When the switch is configured to use RADIUS it reverts to local authentication only if one of these two conditions exists a Local is the authentication option for the access method being used m The switch has been configured to query one or more RADIUS servers for aprimary authentication request but has not received aresponse and local is the configured secondary option For local authentication the switch uses the Operator level and Manager level username password set s previously configured locally on the switch These are the usernames and passwords you can configure using the CLI password command the web browser interface or the menu interface which enables only local password configuration m Ifthe operator at the requesting terminal correctly enters the user name password pair for either access level Operator or Manager access is granted on the basis of which username password pair was used For example suppose you configure Telnet primary access for RADIUS and Telnet secondary access for local If a RADIUS access attempt fails then you can still get access to either the Operator or Manager level of the switch by entering the correct username pass word pair for
271. rces If no VLAN is assigned to unauthenticated clients the port is blocked and no network access is available Should another client success fully authenticate through that port any unauthenticated clients on the unauth vid are dropped from the port MAC based Authentication When a client connects to a MAC Auth enabled port traffic is blocked The switch immediately submits the client s MAC address in the format specified by the addr format as its certification credentials to the RADIUS server for authentication If the client is authenticated and the maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on the port addr limit has not been reached the port is assigned to a static untagged VLAN for network access The assigned VLAN is determined in order of priority as follows 1 Ifthere is a RADIUS assigned VLAN then for the duration of the client session the port belongs to this VLAN and temporarily drops all other VLAN memberships 2 Ifthere is no RADIUS assigned VLAN then for the duration of the client session the port belongs to the Authorized VLAN auth vid if configured and temporarily drops all other VLAN memberships 3 Ifneither 1 or 2 above apply but the port is an untagged member of a statically configured port based VLAN then the port remains in this VLAN 3 7 Web and MAC Authentication How Web and MAC Authentication Operate 4 Ifneither 1 2 or 3 above apply then the client session does not have ac
272. rently logged intrusions as prior to the time of the reset Alert Flag Status for Entries Forced Off of the Intrusion Log If the Intrusion Log is full of entries for which the alert flags have not been reset a new intrusion will cause the oldest entry to drop off the list but will not change Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Operating Notes for Port Security the alert flag status for the port referenced in the dropped entry This means that even if an entry is forced off of the Intrusion Log no new intrusions can be logged on the port referenced in that entry until you reset the alert flags LACP Not Available on Ports Configured for Port Security To main tain security LACP is not allowed on ports configured for port security If you configure port security on a port on which LACP active or passive is configured the switch removes the LACP configuration displays a notice that LACP is disabled on the port s and enables port security on that port For example ProCurve config port security e al7 learn mode static address limit 2 LACP has been disabled on secured port s ProCurve config The switch will not allow you to configure LACP on a port on which port security is enabled For example ProCurve config int e al7 lacp passive Error configuring port A17 LACP and port security cannot be run together ProCurve config To restore LACP to the port you must remove port security and re enab
273. required for a client that does not support 802 1q VLAN tagging A port can simultaneously have one untagged VLAN membership and multiple tagged VLAN memberships Depending on how you configure 802 1X Open VLAN mode for a port a statically configured untagged VLAN membership may become unavailable while there is a client session on the port See also Tagged Membership in a VLAN 8 9 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X General 802 1X Authenticator Operation General 802 1X Authenticator Operation This operation provides security on a direct point to point link between a single client and the switch where both devices are 802 1X aware If you expect desirable clients that do not have the necessary 802 1X supplicant software you can provide a path for downloading such software by using the 802 1X Open VLAN mode refer to 802 1X Open VLAN Mode on page 8 26 Example of the Authentication Process Suppose that you have configured a port on the switch for 802 1X authentica tion operation If you then connect an 802 1X aware client supplicant to the port and attempt to log on l When the switch detects the client on the port it blocks access to the LAN from that port The switch responds with an identity request The client responds with a user name that uniquely defines this request for the client The switch responds in one of the following ways e If802 1X port access on the s
274. rized Manager Entry Continued Editing or Deleting an Authorized Manager Entry Go to the IP Manag ers List screen figure 10 1 highlight the desired entry and press E for Edit or D for Delete CLI Viewing and Configuring Authorized IP Managers Authorized IP Managers Commands Used in This Section Command Page show ip authorized managers below ip authorized managers 10 7 lt ip address gt 10 8 lt ip mask bits gt 10 8 access lt operator manager gt Listing the Switch s Current Authorized IP Manager s Use the show ip authorized managers command to list IP stations authorized to access the switch For example 10 6 Using Authorized IP Managers Defining Authorized Management Stations ProCurve show ip authorized managers IP Managers Authorized Manager IP Access Level 10 28 227 255 255 255 252 Manager 10 28 227 255 255 255 254 Manager 10 28 227 255 255 299 255 Manager 10 28 227 255 255 255 0 Operator Figure 10 3 Example of the Show IP Authorized Manager Display The above example shows an Authorized IP Manager List that allows stations to access the switch as shown below IP Mask Authorized Station IP Address Access Mode 255 255 255 254 10 28 227 104 through 105 Manager 255 255 255 255 10 28 227 125 Manager 255 255 255 0 10 28 227 0 through 255 Operator Configuring IP Authorized Managers for the Switch Syntax ip authorized managers lt ip address gt Configure
275. rnames and passwords configured on the switch This command disables the password clear function of the Clear button so that pressing it has no effect on any local usernames and passwords Default Enabled Note Although the Clear button does not erase passwords when disabled you can still use it with the Reset button Reset Clear to restore the switch to its factory default configuration as described under Restoring the Factory Default Configuration on page 2 9 This command displays a Caution message in the CLI If you want to proceed with disabling the Clear button type Y otherwise type N For example ProCurve config no front panel security password clear CAUTION xxx Disabling the clear button prevents switch passwords from being easily reset or recovered Ensure that you are familiar with the front panel security options before proceeding Indicates the command has disabled the Clear Continue with disabling the clear button y n y button on the switch s front panel In this case the Show command does not include the reset ProCurve config show front panel security on clear status because it is inoperable while Clear Password Disabled lt _ __ the Clear Password functionality is disabled and Factory Reset Enabled must be reconfigured whenever Clear Password Password Recovery Enabled is re enabled Figure 2 8 Example of Disabling the Clear Button and Displ
276. rver is correctly configured to receive an authentication request from the switch No server s responding Not legal combination of authentication methods The switch is configured for and attempting RADIUS authentication however it is not receiving a response from a RADIUS server Ensure that the switch is configured to access at least one RADIUS server Use show radius If you also see the message Can t reach RADIUS server lt x x x x gt trythe suggestions listed for that message Indicates an attempt to configure local as both the primary and secondary authentication methods If local is the primary method then none must be the secondary method 5 32 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Contents QV EL VICW siaredir a aa e cers E OEE ning boned thle E od ova tleranga NE 6 2 Terminology suier oaea de cies Riv td den hh eaten be eee wee aes 6 4 Prerequisite for Using SSH 0 20 ccc eee 6 5 Public Key Formats 00 E ETENE E eee eens 6 5 Steps for Configuring and Using SSH for Switch and Client Authentication 00 0200 cee eee eee 6 6 General Operating Rules and Notes 2 0 0 cece eee eens 6 8 Configuring the Switch for SSH Operation 0 0000 cee eee 6 9 1 Assign Local Login Operator and Enable Manager Password 6 9 2 Generate the Switch s Public and Private Key Pair 6 10 3 Provide the Switch s Public Key to Clients
277. rview Overview Feature Default Menu CLI Web Configure Web Authentication n a 3 17 Configure MAC Authentication n a 3 22 Display Web Authentication Status and Configuration n a 3 26 Display MAC Authentication Status and Configuration n a 3 28 Note Web and MAC Authentication are designed for employment on the edge of a network to provide port based security measures for protecting private networks and the switch itself from unauthorized access Because neither method requires clients to run any special supplicant software both are suitable for legacy systems and temporary access situations where introduc ing supplicant software is not an attractive option Both methods rely on using a RADIUS server for authentication This simplifies access security manage ment by allowing you to control access from a master database in a single server You can use up to three RADIUS servers to provide backups in case access to the primary server fails It also means the same credentials can be used for authentication regardless of which switch or switch port is the current access point into the LAN Web Authentication Web Auth This method uses a web page login to authenticate users for access to the network When a user connects to the switch and opens a web browser the switch automatically presents a login page The user then enters a username and password which the switch forwards to a RADIUS server for au
278. ry and FFI is the system module that generated the entry For further information display the Intrusion Log as shown below From the CLI Type the log command from the Manager or Configuration level Syntax log search text For search text you can use ffi security or violation For example roCurve contig log security _____ Log Command with security Keys W Warning I Information for Search String D Debug Event Log listing Events Since Boot Log Listing with W 08 01 02 01 18 15 FFI port a2 Security Violation Security Violation w 08 01 02 04 28 08 FFI port Al Security Violation Detected l Bottom of Log Events Listed 2 ProCurve config log security ee 3 K W W I Inf ti Log Listing with No RES SENLI eee ion Security Violation gt M Major D Debug l Detected Event Log listing Events Since Boot Bottom of Log Events Listed 0 Figure 9 14 Example of Log Listing With and Without Detected Security Violations From the Menu Interface In the Main Menu click on 4 Event Log and use Next page and Prev page to review the Event Log contents For More Event Log Information See Using the Event Log To Identify Problem Sources in the Troubleshooting chapter of the Management and Configuration Guide for your switch 9 24 Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Operating Notes for Port Security Web Checking for Intrusions Listing Intrusion
279. s Control 802 1X PtP Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Remote No No No No No Port Security MAC address PtP Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Remote Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Authorized IP Managers PtP Yes Yes Yes Yes No Remote Yes Yes Yes Yes No General Switch Traffic Security Guidelines Where the switch is running multiple security options it implements network traffic security based on the OSI Open Systems Interconnection model precedence of the individual options from the lowest to the highest The following list shows the order in which the switch implements configured security features on traffic moving through a given port 1 Disabled Enabled physical port 2 Port security 3 Authorized IP Managers 4 Application features at higher levels in the OSI model such as SSH The above list does not address the mutually exclusive relationship that exists among some security features 1 4 Getting Started Conventions Conventions This guide uses the following conventions for command syntax and displayed information Command Syntax Statements Syntax aaa port access authenticator lt port list gt control lt authorized auto unauthorized gt m Vertical bars separate alternative mutually exclusive elements m Square brackets indicate optional elements m Braces lt gt enclose required elements m Braces within square brackets lt gt indicate a required element within an optional choice
280. s a server to the RADIUS configuration key lt server specific key string gt Optional Specifies an encryption key for use during authentication or accounting sessions with the spec ified server This key must match the key used on the RADIUS server Use this option only if the specified server requires a different key than configured for the global encryption key radius server key lt global key string gt Specifies the global encryption key the switch uses for sessions with servers for which the switch does not have a server specific key This key is optional if all RADIUS server addresses configured in the switch include a server specific encryption key 5 Enable 802 1X Authentication on the Switch After configuring 802 1X authentication as described in the preceding four sections activate it with this command Syntax aaa port access authenticator active Activates 802 1X port access on ports you have configured as authenticators 8 24 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Configuring Switch Ports as 802 1X Authenticators 6 Optionally Resetting Authenticator Operation After authentication has begun operating these commands can be used to reset authentication and related statistics on specific ports Syntax aaa port access authenticator lt port list gt initialize On the specified ports blocks inbound and outbound traffic and restarts the 802 1X authentication process
281. s and Notes Once you generate a certificate on the switch you should avoid re generating the certificate without a compelling reason Otherwise you will have to re introduce the switch s certificate on all manage ment stations clients you previously set up for SSL access to the switch In some situations this can temporarily allow security breaches The switch s own public private certificate key pair and certificate are stored in the switch s flash memory and are not affected by reboots or the erase startup config command The public private certificate key pair is not be confused with the SSH public private key pair The certificate key pair and the SSH key pair are independent of each other which means a switch can have two keys pairs stored in flash On ProCurve switches that support stacking when stacking is enabled SSL provides security only between an SSL client and the stack manager Communications between the stack commander and stack members is not secure 7 6 Configuring Secure Socket Layer SSL General Operating Rules and Notes Configuring the Switch for SSL Operation SSL Related CLI Commands in This Section Page web managementss page7 19 show config page 7 19 show crypto host cert page 7 12 crypto key generate cert rsa lt 512 768 11024 gt page 7 10 zeroize cert page 7 10 crypto host cert generate self signed arg list page 7 10 zeroize page 7 10 1 Assign Local Login Operator
282. s are allowed in the port number portion of the command string ProCurve config show port security A1 A3 A6 A8 Configuring Port Security Using the CLI you can Configure port security and edit security settings m Add or delete devices from the list of authorized addresses for one or more ports m Clear the Intrusion flag on specific ports Syntax port security e lt port list gt learn mode lt continuous static configured port access gt address limit lt integer gt mac address lt mac addr gt lt mac addr gt lt mac addr gt action lt none send alarm send disable gt clear intrusion flag For the configured option above refer to the Note on page 9 6 no port security lt port list gt mac address lt mac addr gt lt mac addr gt lt mac addr gt Specifying Authorized Devices and Intrusion Responses Learn Mode Static This example configures port Al to automatically accept the first device MAC address it detects as the only authorized device for that port The default device limit is 1 It also configures the port to send an alarm to a network management station and disable itself if an intruder is detected on the port ProCurve config port security al learn mode static action send disable The next example does the same as the preceding example except that it specifies a MAC address of 0c0090 123456 as the authorized device instead of allowing the port to
283. s based and stackable ProCurve switches Where port identities are needed in an example this guide uses the chassis based port identity system such as A1 B3 B5 C7 etc However unless otherwise noted such examples apply equally to the stackable switches which for port identities typically use only numbers such as 1 3 5 15 etc 1 6 Getting Started Sources for More Information Sources for More Information For additional information about switch operation and features not covered in this guide consult the following sources For information on which product manual to consult on a given software feature refer to Product Documentation on page xi Note For the latest version of all ProCurve switch documentation including release notes covering recently added features visit the ProCurve Networking Web Site at www procurve com Click on Technical support and then click on Product manuals all m For information on specific parameters in the Menu interface refer to the online help provided in the interface For example CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Switch Configuration Internet IP Service Default Gateway 10 35 204 1 Default TTL 64 IP Config DHCP Bootp Manual Online Help for IP Address 10 35 204 104 Menu interface Subnet Mask 255 255 240 0 Actions gt Cancel Edit save Display help information Use arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to
284. s in the previous example you will need to assign a server specific key in the switch that applies only to the designated server ProCurve config tacacs server host 10 28 227 87 key south10campus With both of the above keys configured in the switch the south10campus key overrides the north40campus key only when the switch tries to access the TACACS server having the 10 28 227 87 address Controlling Web Browser Interface Access When Using TACACS Authentication Configuring the switch for TACACS authentication does not affect web browser interface access To prevent unauthorized access through the web browser interface do one or more of the following Configure local authentication a Manager user name and password and optionally an Operator user name and password on the switch m Configure the switch s Authorized IP Manager feature to allow web browser access only from authorized management stations The Authorized IP Manager feature does not interfere with TACACS operation m Disable web browser access to the switch by going to the System Information screen in the Menu interface and configuring the Web Agent Enabled parameter to No 4 24 TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Switch Messages Related to TACACS Operation The switch generates the CLI messages listed below However you may see other messages generated in your TACACS server application For informa tion on such messages refer
285. s one or more authorized IP addresses lt ip mask bits gt Configures the IP mask for lt ip address gt access lt operator manager gt Configures the privilege level for lt ip address gt Applies only to access through Telnet SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c Refer to the Note on page 11 3 To Authorize Manager Access This command authorizes manager level access for any station having an IP address of 10 28 227 0 through 10 28 227 255 ProCurve config ip authorized managers 10 28 227 101 255 255 255 0 access manager 10 7 Using Authorized IP Managers Defining Authorized Management Stations Similarly the next command authorizes manager level access for any station having an IP address of 10 28 227 101 through 103 ProCurve config ip authorized managers 10 28 227 101 255 255 255 252 access manager If you omit the lt mask bits gt when adding a new authorized manager the switch automatically uses 255 255 255 255 for the mask If you do not specify either Manager or Operator access the switch automatically assigns the Manager access For example ProCurve Switch 2824 config ip authorized managers 10 28 227 105 ProCurve Switch 2824 config show ip authorized mana IP Managers Authorized Manager IP IP Mask 10 28 227 105 255 255 255 255 Omitting a mask in the ip authorized managers command results in a default mask of 255 255 255 255 which authorizes only the specified station Refer t
286. s with the specified server This key must match the encryption key used on the RADIUS server Use this command only if the specified server requires a different encryption key than configured for the global encryption key no radius server host lt jp address gt key Use the no form of the command to remove the key for a specified server 5 10 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Configuring the Switch for RADIUS Authentication For example suppose you have configured the switch as shown in figure 5 3 and you now need to make the following changes 1 Change the encryption key for the server at 10 33 18 127 to source0127 2 Add a RADIUS server with an IP address of 10 33 18 119 and a server specific encryption key of source0119 ProCurve show radius Status and Counters General RADIUS Information Deadtime min O Timeout secs 5 Retransmit Attempts 5 Global Encryption Key Auth Acet Server IP Addr Port Port Encryption Key 10 33 168 127 1612 1813 TempKeyO1 Figure 5 3 Sample Configuration for RADIUS Server Before Changing the Key and Adding Another Server To make the changes listed prior to figure 5 3 you would do the following ProCurve config radius server host 10 33 18 127 key source0127 lt __ Changes the key for the existing ProCurve config radius server host 10 33 18 119 key source0119 server to source0127 ProCurve config show radius Status a
287. scribe how to copy client public keys into the switch for RSA challenge response authenti cation and require an understanding of how to use your SSH client applica tion Bit Size Exponent lt e gt Modulus lt n gt Comment 1024 35 11407406661 701446907963 80365284018053 9127043 111482882509285550110168603 082 409355321119922465153140 745413543 7656095899682 91396053556814 705585051025488575846923 smith support cairns com Figure 6 14 Example of a Client Public Key 6 24 Notes Configuring Secure Shell SSH Further Information on SSH Client Public Key Authentication Comments in public key files such as smith support cairns com in figure 6 14 may appear in a SSH client application s generated public key While such comments may help to distinguish one key from another they do not pose any restriction on the use of a key by multiple clients and or users Public key illustrations such as the key shown in figure 6 14 usually include line breaks as a method for showing the whole key However in practice line breaks in a public key will cause errors resulting in authentication failure 1 Use your SSH client application to create a public private key pair Refer to the documentation provided with your SSH client application for details The switch supports the following client public key properties Property Key Format Key Type Maximum Supported Public Key Length Maximum Key Size Supported Value ASCI
288. secondary authentication mode being used For a listing of authentication options see table 4 2 Primary Secondary Authentication Table on 4 13 For local authentication the switch uses the operator level and manager level username password set s previously configured locally on the switch These are the usernames and passwords you can configure using the CLI password command the web browser interface or the menu interface which enables only local password configuration m Ifthe operator at the requesting terminal correctly enters the user name password pair for either access level access is granted m Ifthe username password pair entered at the requesting terminal does not match either username password pair previously configured locally in the switch access is denied In this case the terminal is again prompted to enter a username password pair In the default configuration the switch allows up to three attempts If the requesting terminal exhausts the attempt limit without a successful authentica tion the login session is terminated and the operator at the requesting terminal must initiate a new session before trying again The switch s menu allows you to configure only the local Operator and Manager passwords and not any usernames In this case all prompts for local authentication will request only a local password However if you use the CLI or the web browser interface to configure usernames for local access y
289. sed and Client Based Access Control 802 1X on page 8 1 m Exec accounting Provides records holding the information listed below about login sessions console Telnet and SSH on the switch e Acct Session Id e Acct Delay Time e Acct Status Type e Acct Session Time e Acct Terminate Cause Username e Acct Authentic e Service Type e NAS IP Address e NAS Identifier e Calling Station Id m System accounting Provides records containing the information listed below when system events occur on the switch including system reset system boot and enabling or disabling of system accounting e Acct Session Id e Acct Delay Time e Acct Status Type e Username e Acct Terminate Cause Service Type e Acct Authentic NAS IP Address e NAS lIdentifier e Calling Station Id 5 18 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Configuring RADIUS Accounting The switch forwards the accounting information it collects to the designated RADIUS server where the information is formatted stored and managed by the server For more information on this aspect of RADIUS accounting refer to the documentation provided with your RADIUS server Operating Rules for RADIUS Accounting You can configure up to three types of accounting to run simulta neously exec system and network RADIUS servers used for accounting are also used for authentication The switch must be configured to access at least one RADIUS server RADIUS servers are accessed in
290. shl 896 bf fb 8a d0 10 5a 48 57 61 9 8a 6a 61 13 8a fb host_sshz pub Figure 6 10 Examples of Visual Phonetic and Hexadecimal Conversions of the Switch s Public Key The two commands shown in figure 6 10 convert the displayed format of the switch s host public key for easier visual comparison of the switch s public key to a copy of the key in a client s known host file The switch has only one RSA host key The babble and fingerprint options produce two hashes for the key one that corresponds to the challenge hash you will see if con necting with a v1 client and the other corresponding to the hash you will see if connecting with a v2 client These hashes do not correspond to different keys but differ only because of the way v1 and v2 clients compute the hash of the same RSA key The switch always uses ASCII version without babble or fingerprint conversion of its public key for file storage and default display format 4 Enable SSH on the Switch and Anticipate SSH Client Contact Behavior The ip ssh command enables or disables SSH on the switch and modifies parameters the switch uses for transactions with clients After you enable SSH the switch can authenticate itself to SSH clients Note Before enabling SSH on the switch you must generate the switch s public private key pair If you have not already done so refer to 2 Generate the Switch s Public and Private Key Pair on page 6 10
291. splays the config statistics session counters data for the specified port s Does not display data for a specified port that is not enabled as an authenticator e With config statistics session counters only displays the config statistics session counters data for all ports enabled as authenticators For descriptions of config statistics session counters refer to the next section of this table 8 47 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Displaying 802 1X Configuration Statistics and Counters show port access authenticator Syntax Continued config e lt port list gt Shows e Whether port access authenticator is active The 802 1X configuration of the ports configured as 802 1X authenticators e Use show running fo view the current client limit configuration available for switches If you do not specify lt port list gt the command lists all ports configured as 802 1X port access authenticators Does not display data for a specified port that is not enabled as an authenticator statistics e lt port list gt Shows e Whether port access authenticator is active e The statistics of the ports configured as 802 1X authenticators including the supplicant s MAC address as determined by the content of the last EAPOL frame received on the port Does not display data for a specified port that is not enabled as an authenticator session counters e
292. ssword and in a later session the Manager password is not entered correctly in response to a prompt from the switch then the switch does not allow management access for that session Passwords are case sensitive If the switch has neither a Manager nor an Operator password anyone having access to the switch through either Telnet the serial port or the web browser interface can access the switch with full manager privileges Also if you configure only an Operator password entering the Operator pass word enables full manager privileges The rest of this section covers how to m Set passwords m Delete passwords Recover from a lost password 2 3 Configuring Username and Password Security Configuring Local Password Security Configuring Local Password Security Menu Setting Passwords As noted earlier in this section usernames are optional Configuring a user name requires either the CLI or the web browser interface 1 From the Main Menu select 3 Console Passwords SESER CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Set Password Menu Set Operator Password Set Manager Password Delete Password Protection Return to Main Menu DOUNE Prompts you to enter an Operator level password To select menu item press item number or highlight item and press lt Enter gt Figure 2 1 The Set Password Screen 2 To set anew password a Select Set Manager Password or Set Operator
293. st recently received until one of the above events occurs Also if you move a link with an authenticator from one 8 53 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X How RADIUS 802 1X Authentication Affects VLAN Operation supplicant port to another without clearing the statistics data from the first port the authenticator s MAC address will appear in the supplicant statistics for both ports How RADIUS 802 1X Authentication Affects VLAN Operation Static VLAN Requirement RADIUS authentication for an 802 1X client on a given port can include a static VLAN requirement Refer to the documen tation provided with your RADIUS application The static VLAN to which a RADIUS server assigns a client must already exist on the switch If it does not exist or is a dynamic VLAN created by GVRP authentication fails Also for the session to proceed the port must be an untagged member of the required VLAN If itis not the switch temporarily reassigns the port as described below If the Port Used by the Client Is Not Configured as an Untagged Member of the Required Static VLAN When a client is authenticated on port N if port N is not already configured as an untagged member of the static VLAN specified by the RADIUS server then the switch temporarily assigns port N as an untagged member of the required VLAN for the duration of the 802 1X session At the same time if port N is already configured
294. static port based VLAN to which the port belongs as an untagged member d Any VLAN s to which the port is configured as a tagged member provided that the client can operate in that VLAN e lf another client is already authenticated on the port then the port is already assigned to a VLAN for the previously existing client session and the new client must operate in this same VLAN regardless of other factors This means that a client without 802 1X client authentication software cannot access a configured Unauthenticated Client VLAN if another authenticated client is already using the port Note Limitation on Using an Unauthorized Client VLAN on an 802 1X Port Configured to Allow Multiple Client Access You can optionally enable switches to allow up to 2 clients per port The Unauthorized Client VLAN feature can operate on an 802 1X configured port regardless of how many clients the portis configured to support However all clients on the same port must operate through the same untagged VLAN membership This means that any client accessing a given port must be able to authenticate and operate on the same VLAN as any other previously authenticated clients that are currently using the port Thus an Unauthorized Client VLAN configured on a switch port that allows multiple 802 1X clients cannot be used if there is already an authenticated client using the port on another VLAN Also a client using the Unauthenticated Client VLAN will
295. switch Configure the switch with the correct IP address and encryption key to access the RADIUS server Configure the switch for Web Auth a Configure Web Authentication on the switch ports you want to use b Ifthe necessary to avoid address conflicts with the secure network specify the base IP address and mask to be used by the switch for temporary DHCP addresses The lease length for these temporary IP addresses may also be set c Ifyou plan to use SSL for logins configure and enable SSL on the switch before you specify it for use with Web Auth d Configure the switch to use the redirect URL for authorized clients Test both authorized and unauthorized access to your system to ensure that Web Authentication works properly on the ports you have configured for port access using Web Authentication Client web browsers may not use a proxy server to access the network Web and MAC Authentication Configuring Web Authentication Configure the Switch for Web Based Authentication Command Page Configuration Level aaa port access web based dhcp addr 3 18 aaa port access web based dhcp lease 3 18 no aaa port access web based e lt port list gt 3 19 auth vid 3 19 client limit 3 19 client moves 3 19 logoff period 3 20 max requests 3 20 max retries 3 20 quiet period 3 20 reauth period 3 20 reauthenticate 3 20 redirect url 3 21 server timeout 3 21 ssl login 3 21 unauth vid 3 22 Synta
296. switch When the requesting terminal responds to the prompt with a password the switch forwards it to the TACACS server and one of the following actions occurs If the username password pair received from the requesting terminal matches a username password pair previously stored in the server then the server passes access permission through the switch to the terminal If the username password pair entered at the requesting terminal does not match a username password pair previously stored in the server access is denied In this case the terminal is again prompted to enter a username and repeat steps 2 through 4 In the default configuration the switch allows up to three attempts to authenticate a login session If the requesting terminal exhausts the attempt limit without a successful TACACS authentication the login session is terminated and the operator at the requesting terminal must initiate a new session before trying again 4 21 TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Switch Note Local Authentication Process When the switch is configured to use TACACS it reverts to local authenti cation only if one of these two conditions exists Local is the authentication option for the access method being used m TACACS is the primary authentication mode for the access method being used However the switch was unable to connect to any TACACS servers or no servers were configured and Local is the
297. t are authorized to access the network through that port This enables individual ports to detect prevent and log attempts by unauthorized devices to communicate through the switch This feature does not prevent intruders from receiving broadcast and multi cast traffic Basic Operation Default Port Security Operation The default port security setting for each port is off or continuous That is any device can access a port without causing a security reaction Intruder Protection A port that detects an intruder blocks the intruding device from transmitting to the network through that port 9 2 Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Overview General Operation for Port Security On a per port basis you can configure security measures to block unauthorized devices and to send notice of security violations Once you have configured port security you can then monitor the network for security violations through one or more of the following Alert flags that are captured by network management tools m Alert Log entries in the switch s web browser interface m Event Log entries in the console interface m Intrusion Log entries in either the menu interface CLI or web browser interface For any port you can configure the following Authorized MAC Addresses Specify up to eight devices MAC addresses that are allowed to send inbound traffic through the port This feature e Closes the port to inbound traffic
298. t for that port and the violation is entered in the Intrusion Log The switch can detect and handle subsequent intrusions on that port but will not log another intrusion on the port until you reset the alert flag for either all ports or for the individual port On a given port ifthe intrusion action is to send an SNMP trap and then disable the port send disable and then an intruder is detected on the port the switch sends an SNMP trap sets the port s alert flag and disables the port If you re enable the port without resetting the port s alert flag then the port operates as follows m The port comes up and will block traffic from unauthorized devices it detects m Ifthe port detects another intruder it will send another SNMP trap but will not become disabled again unless you first reset the port s intrusion flag This operation enables the port to continue passing traffic for authorized devices while you locate and eliminate the intruder Otherwise the presence of an intruder could cause the switch to repeatedly disable the port Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Reading Intrusion Alerts and Resetting Alert Flags Menu Checking for Intrusions Listing Intrusion Alerts and Resetting Alert Flags The menu interface indicates per port intrusions in the Port Status screen and provides details and the reset function in the Intrusion Log screen 1 From the Main Menu select 1 Status and Counters 4 Port Status
299. t operating in an LACP trunk you must remove the port from the trunk refer to the Note on Web MAC Authentication and LACP on page 3 12 Determine whether any VLAN assignments are needed for authenticated clients a Ifyou configure the RADIUS server to assign a VLAN for an authen ticated client this assignment overrides any VLAN assignments con figured on the switch while the authenticated client session remains active Note that the VLAN must be statically configured on the switch b Ifthereisno RADIUS assigned VLAN the port can join an Authorized VLAN for the duration of the client session if you choose to configure one This must be a port based statically configured VLAN on the switch 3 12 Web and MAC Authentication General Setup Procedure for Web MAC Authentication c Ifthere is neither a RADIUS assigned VLAN or an Authorized VLAN for an authenticated client session on a port then the port s VLAN membership remains unchanged during authenticated client ses sions In this case configure the port for the VLAN in which you want it to operate during client sessions Note that when configuring a RADIUS server to assign a VLAN you can use either the VLAN s name or VID For example if a VLAN configured in the switch has a VID of 100 and is named vlan100 you could configure the RADIUS server to use either 100 or vlan100 to specify the VLAN Determine whether to use the optional Una
300. tagged port based VLAN membership Authentication Server The entity providing an authentication service to the switch when the switch is configured to operate as an authenticator In the case of a switch running 802 1X this is a RADIUS server unless local authentication is used in which case the switch performs this function using its own username and password for authenticating a supplicant Authenticator In ProCurve applications a switch that requires a supplicant to provide the proper credentials before being allowed access to the network CHAP MD5 Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol Client In this application an end node device such as amanagement station workstation or mobile PC linked to the switch through a point to point LAN link Client Based Authentication The 802 1X extension in the switches cov ered in this guide In this operation multiple clients on the same port must individually authenticate themselves Guest VLAN See Unauthorized Client VLAN EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP enables network access that supports multiple authentication methods 8 7 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Terminology EAPOL Extensible Authentication Protocol Over LAN as defined in the 802 1 X standard Friendly Client A client that does not pose a security risk if given access to the switch and your network MD5 An algorithm for calculating a unique
301. tallation and Getting Started Guide you received with the switch Important Getting Started Need Only a Quick Start To Set Up and Install the Switch in Your Network Use the Installation and Getting Started Guide shipped with your switch for the following Notes cautions and warnings related to installing and using the switch Instructions for physically installing the switch in your network m Quickly assigning an IP address and subnet mask setting a Manager password and optionally configuring other basic features m Interpreting LED behavior For the latest version of the Installation and Getting Started Guide and other documentation for your switch visit the ProCurve Networking Web site Refer to Product Documentation on page xi of this guide for further details 1 9 Getting Started Need Only a Quick Start 1 10 Configuring Username and Password Security Contents OVEIVICW aare o a ate piece Sense ai loces Gtk hea gate a a AS EE 4 Pee eee 2 2 Configuring Local Password Security 00 cece ee eee 2 4 Menu Setting Passwords 00 0 cece eee eee eee ee 2 4 CLI Setting Passwords and Usernames 2 20000005 2 5 Web Setting Passwords and Usernames 0 000 2 6 Front Panel Security 2c ee eS eben ce welds cs ee dlele T 2 7 When Security Is Important 00 0 c eee ee eee 2 7 Front Panel Button Functions 0 000
302. that port Clients that connect without trying to authenticate will have access to the untagged VLAN mem bership that is currently assigned to the port VLAN Membership Priorities Following client authentication an 802 1X port resumes membership in any tagged VLANs for which it is already assigned in the switch configuration The port also becomes an untagged member of one VLAN according to the following order of options 1 1st Priority The port joins a VLAN to which it has been assigned by a RADIUS server during authentication 2 2nd Priority If RADIUS authentication does not include assigning the port to a VLAN then the switch assigns the port to the VLAN entered in the port s 802 1X configuration as an Authorized Client VLAN if config ured 3 3rd Priority If the port does not have an Authorized Client VLAN configured but does have a static untagged VLAN membership in its configuration then the switch assigns the port to this VLAN A port assigned to a VLAN by an Authorized Client VLAN configuration or a RADIUS server will be an untagged member of the VLAN for the duration of the authenticated session This applies even if the port is also configured in the switch as a tagged member of the same VLAN Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X 802 1X Open VLAN Mode Note After client authentication the port resumes membership in any tagged VLANs for which it is configured If the port belo
303. the level you want to enter m Ifthe username password pair entered at the requesting terminal does not match either local username password pair previously configured in the switch access is denied In this case the terminal is again prompted to enter a username password pair In the default configu ration the switch allows up to three attempts If the requesting terminal exhausts the attempt limit without a successful authentica tion the login session is terminated and the operator at the requesting terminal must initiate a new session before trying again 5 16 RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Controlling Web Browser Interface Access When Using RADIUS Authentication Controlling Web Browser Interface Access When Using RADIUS Authentication To prevent unauthorized access through the web browser interface do one or more of the following Configure local authentication a Manager user name and password and optionally an Operator user name and password on the switch m Configure the switch s Authorized IP Manager feature to allow web browser access only from authorized management stations The Authorized IP Manager feature does not interfere with TACACS operation m Disable web browser access to the switch Configuring RADIUS Accounting RADIUS Accounting Commands Page no radius server host lt ip address gt 5 20 acct port lt port number gt 5 20 key lt key string gt 5 20 no aaa accounting
304. thenticated clients When there is an Unauthorized Client VLAN configured on an 802 1X authenticator port an unauthorized client connected to the port has access only to the network resources belonging to the Unauthorized Client VLAN This access continues until the client disconnects from the port If there is no Unauthorized Client VLAN configured on the authenticator port the port simply blocks access for any unauthorized client that cannot be authenticated 8 32 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X 802 1X Open VLAN Mode Condition IP Addressing for a Client Connected to a Port Configured for 802 x Open VLAN Mode Rule A client can either acquire an IP address from a DHCP server or have a preconfigured manual IP address before connecting to the switch 802 1X Supplicant Software for a Client Connected to a Port Configured for 802 1X Open VLAN Mode A friendly client without 802 1X supplicant software connecting to an authenticator port must be able to download this software from the Unauthorized Client VLAN before authentication can begin Switch with a Port Configured To Allow Multiple Authorized Client Sessions When a new client is authenticated on a given port e fno other clients are authenticated on that port then the portjoins one VLAN in the following order of precedence a A RADIUS assigned VLAN if configured b An Authenticated Client VLAN if configured c A
305. thentication After authentication the switch grants access to the secured network Other than a web browser the client needs no special supplicant software Client web browsers may not use a proxy server to access the network MAC Authentication MAC Auth This method grants access to a secure network by authenticating devices for access to the network When a device connects to the switch either by direct link or through the network the switch forwards the device s MAC address to the RADIUS server for authentication The RADIUS server uses the device MAC address as the username and 3 2 Note Web and MAC Authentication Overview password and grants or denies network access in the same way that it does for clients capable of interactive logons The process does not use either a client device configuration or a logon session MAC authentication is well suited for clients that are not capable of providing interactive logons such as telephones printers and wireless access points Also because most RADIUS servers allow for authentication to depend on the source switch and port through which the client connects to the network you can use MAC Auth to lock a particular device to a specific switch and port You can configure only one authentication type on a port This means that Web authentication MAC authentication 802 1X MAC lockdown MAC lock out and port security are mutually exclusive on a given port Also LACP m
306. to one of the stored public keys can gain access to the switch using SSH That is if you use this feature only the clients whose public keys are in the client public key file you store on the switch will have SSH access to the switch over the network If you do not allow secondary SSH login Operator access via local password then the switch will refuse other SSH clients SSH clients that support client public key authentication normally provide a utility to generate a key pair The private key is usually stored in a password protected file on the local host the public key is stored in another file and is not protected Note that even without using client public key authentication you can still require authentication from whoever attempts to access the switch from an SSH client by employing the local username password TACACS or RADIUS features Refer to 5 Configure the Switch for SSH Authentication on page 6 18 If you enable client public key authentication the following events occur when a client tries to access the switch using SSH 1 The client sends its public key to the switch with a request for authenti cation 2 The switch compares the client s public key to those stored in the switch s client public key file As a prerequisite you must use the switch s copy tftp command to download this file to flash Configuring Secure Shell SSH Further Information on SSH Client Public Key Authentication 3
307. to try contacting a RADIUS server before trying another RADIUS server or quitting This depends on how many RADIUS servers you have configured the switch to access Determine whether you want to bypass a RADIUS server that fails to respond to requests for service To shorten authentication time you can set a bypass period in the range of 1 to 1440 minutes for non responsive servers This requires that you have multiple RADIUS servers accessible for service requests Configuring the Switch for RADIUS Authentication RADIUS Authentication Commands Page aaa authentication 5 8 lt console telnet ssh web gt lt enable login gt radius 5 8 lt local none gt 5 8 no radius server host lt P address gt 5 10 auth port lt port number gt 5 10 acct port lt port number gt 5 10 5 20 key lt server specific key string gt 5 10 no radius server key lt global key string gt 5 12 radius server timeout lt 1 15 gt 5 12 radius server retransmit lt 1 5 gt 5 12 no radius server dead time lt 1 1440 gt 5 14 show radius 5 25 lt host lt ip address gt 5 26 show authentication 5 28 show radius authentication 5 28 Note RADIUS Authentication and Accounting Configuring the Switch for RADIUS Authentication Outline of the Steps for Configuring RADIUS Authentication There are three main steps to configuring RADIUS authentication 1 Configure RADIUS authentication for controlling
308. to view this temporary change to the active configuration as shown below m You can see the temporary VLAN assignment by using the show vlan lt vlan id gt command with the lt vlan id gt of the static VLAN that the authenticated client is using 8 55 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X How RADIUS 802 1X Authentication Affects VLAN Operation ProCurve config show vlan 22 Status and Counters VLAN Information Ports VLAN 22 602 10 VLAN ID 22 Name vlan_22 Status Static Port Information Mode Unknown VLAN Status Tagged 802 1 Tagged This entry shows that port A2 is temporarily untagged on VLAN 22 for an 802 1X session This is to accommodate an 802 1X client s access authenticated by a RADIUS server where the server included an instruction to put the client s access on VLAN 22 Note With the current VLAN configuration figure 8 10 the only time port A2 appears in this show vlan 22 listing is during an 802 1X session with an attached client Otherwise port A2 is not listed Figure 8 11 The Active Configuration for VLAN 22 Temporarily Changes for the 802 1X Session With the preceding in mind since static VLAN 33 is configured as untagged on port A2 see figure 8 10 and since a port can be untagged on only one VLAN port A2 loses access to VLAN 33 for the duration of the 802 1X session involving VLAN 22 You can verify the temporary loss of access to VLAN 33 w
309. tors Inspecting 802 1X Open VLAN Mode Operation For information and an example on viewing current Open VLAN mode operation refer to Viewing 802 1X Open VLAN Mode Status on page 8 50 802 1X Open VLAN Operating Notes Although you can configure Open VLAN mode to use the same VLAN for both the Unauthorized Client VLAN and the Authorized Client VLAN this is not recommended Using the same VLAN for both purposes allows unauthenticated clients access to a VLAN intended only for authenticated clients which poses a security breach While an Unauthorized Client VLAN is in use on a port the switch temporarily removes the port from any other statically configured VLAN for which that port is configured as a member Note that the Menu interface will still display the port s statically configured VLAN s A VLAN used as the Unauthorized Client VLAN should not allow access to resources that must be protected from unauthenticated clients Ifa port is configured as a tagged member of VLAN X that is not used as an Unauthorized Client Authorized Client or RADIUS assigned VLAN then the port returns to tagged membership in VLAN X upon successful client authentication This happens even if the RADIUS server assigns the port to another authorized VLAN Y Note that if RADIUS assigns VLAN X as an authorized VLAN then the port becomes an untagged member of VLAN X for the duration of the client connection After the client disconnects t
310. trol auto Activates 802 1X port access on ports you have configured as authenticators Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X 802 1X Open VLAN Mode 2 Configure the 802 1X authentication type Options include Syntax aaa authentication port access lt local eap radius chap radius gt Determines the type of RADIUS authentication to use local Use the switch s local username and password for supplicant authentication the default eap radiusUse EAP RADIUS authentication Refer to the documentation for your RADIUS server chap radiusUse CHAP RADIUS MD5 authentication Refer to the documentation for your RADIUS server software 3 If you selected either eap radius or chap radius for step 2 use the radius host command to configure up to three RADIUS server IP address es on the switch Syntax radius host lt ip address gt Adds a server to the RADIUS configuration key lt server specific key string gt Optional Specifies an encryption key for use with the specified server This key must match the key used on the RADIUS server Use this option only if the specified server requires a different key than configured for the global encryption key radius server key lt global key string gt Specifies the global encryption key the switch uses for sessions with servers for which the switch does not have a server specific key This key is optional if all RADIUS server addresses configur
311. tup 3 12 LACP not allowed 3 11 redirect URL 3 9 rules of operation 3 10 show status and configuration 3 26 terminology 3 9 web browser interface for configuring authorized IP managers 10 7 10 9 web browser interface for configuring port security 9 17 9 25 web server proxy 9 25 Index 7 8 Index ProCurve Networking by HP Technical information in this document is subject to change without notice Copyright 2008 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P All rights reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws January 2008 Manual Part Number 5991 4763
312. ust be disabled on ports configured for any of these authentication methods Client Options Web Auth and MAC Auth provide a port based solution in which a port can belong to one untagged VLAN at a time The switch allows 2 clients per port In the default configuration the switch blocks access to clients that the RADIUS server does not authenticate However you can configure an individ ual port to provide limited services to unauthorized clients by joining a specified unauthorized VLAN during sessions with such clients The unau thorized VLAN assignment can be the same for all ports or different depend ing on the services and access you plan to allow for unauthenticated clients Access to an optional unauthorized VID is configured in the switch when Web and MAC Authentication are configured on a port 3 3 Web and MAC Authentication Overview General Features Web and MAC Authentication includes the following On a port configured for Web or MAC Authentication the switch operates as a port access authenticator using a RADIUS server and the CHAP protocol Inbound traffic is processed by the switch alone until authentication occurs Some traffic from the switch is available to an unauthorized client for example broadcast or unknown desti nation packets before authentication occurs m Proxy servers may not be used by browsers accessing the switch through ports using Web Authentication m You can optionally co
313. ust be stored on the switch Only a client with a private key that matches a stored public key can gain access to the switch The same private key can be stored on one or more clients Ca Se 1 Switch to Client SSH authentication L ProCurve i Client Switch e 2 Client to Switch login rsa authentication Work ae 3 User to Switch enable password authentication Station SSH options l Server Local l TACACS l l l SSH 4 gt z l RADIUS None Figure 6 1 Client Public Key Authentication Model Configuring Secure Shell SSH Overview Note SSH in the ProCurve is based on the OpenSSH software toolkit For more information on OpenSSH visit www openssh com Switch SSH and User Password Authentication This option is asubset of the client public key authentication show in figure 6 1 It occurs ifthe switch has SSH enabled but does not have login access login public key configured to authenticate the client s key As in figure 6 1 the switch authenticates itself to SSH clients Users on SSH clients then authenticate themselves to the switch login and or enable levels by providing passwords stored locally on the switch or on a TACACS or RADIUS server However the client does not use a key to authenticate itself to the switch P e fs EE nO ee SSH a 1 Switch to Client SSH Client ProCurve A Work S
314. ut having to change the address limit setting m Send an alarm to a management station if an intruder is detected on the port ProCurve config port security Al learn mode configured mac address 0c0090 123456 address limit 3 action send disable Adding a MAC Address to an Existing Port List To simply add a device MAC address to a port s existing Authorized Addresses list enter the port number with the mac address parameter and the device s MAC address This assumes that Learn Mode is either static or configured and the Authorized Addresses list is not already full as deter 9 13 Configuring and Monitoring Port Security Port Security Command Options and Operation mined by the current address limit value For example suppose port Al allows two authorized devices but has only one device in its Authorized Address list Although the Address ProCurve config show port security al Limit is set to 2 only one device has been Port Security authorized for this port Port Al In this case you can add i another without having Learn Mode Continuous Static Address Limit 1 2 to also increase the Action None Address Limit None Authorized Addresses The Address Limit has not been reached 0c0090 123456 Figure 9 4 Example of Adding an Authorized Device to a Port With the above configuration for port A1 the following command adds the 0c0090 456456 MAC address as the second authorized address
315. uthorized VLAN mode for clients that the RADIUS server does not authenticate This VLAN must be statically configured on the switch If you do not configure an Unautho rized VLAN the switch simply blocks access to unauthenticated clients trying to use the port Determine the authentication policy you want on the RADIUS server and configure the server Refer to the documentation provided with your RADIUS application and include the following in the policy for each client or client device e The CHAP RADIUS authentication method e An encryption key e One of the following Ifyou are configuring Web based authentication include the user name and password for each authorized client Ifyou are configuring MAC based authentication enter the device MAC address in both the username and password fields of the RADIUS policy configuration for that device Also if you want to allow a particular device to receive authentication only through a designated port and switch include this in your policy Determine the IP address of the RADIUS server s you will use to support Web or MAC based authentication For information on configuring the switch to access RADIUS servers refer to Configuring the Switch To Access a RADIUS Server on page 3 15 Web and MAC Authentication General Setup Procedure for Web MAC Authentication Additional Information for Configuring the RADIUS Server To Support MAC Authentication On the RADIU
316. vacant slots in the TACACS server priority list and you enter a new IP address the new address will take the vacant slot with the highest priority Thus if A B and C are configured as above and you 1 remove A and B and 2 enter X and Y in that order then the new TACACS server priority list would be X Y and C e The easiest way to change the order of the TACACS servers in the priority list is to remove all server addresses in the list and then re enter them in order with the new first choice server address first and so on To add anew address to the list when there are already three addresses present you mustfirst remove one of the currently listed addresses See also General Authentication Process Using a TACACS Server on page 4 20 4 17 TACACS Authentication Configuring TACACS on the Switch Name Default Range key lt key string gt none null n a Specifies the optional global encryption key that is also assigned in the TACACS server s that the switch will access for authentication This option is subordinate to any per server encryption keys you assign and applies only to accessing TACACS servers for which you have not given the switch a per server key See the host lt ip addr gt key lt key string gt entry at the beginning of this table For more on the encryption key see Using the Encryption Key on page 4 23 and the documentation provided with your TACACS server a
317. w key you must also re enable SSH with the ip ssh command before the switch can resume SSH operation 3 Provide the Switch s Public Key to Clients When an SSH client contacts the switch for the first time the client will challenge the connection unless you have already copied the key into the client s known host file Copying the switch s key in this way reduces the chance that an unauthorized device can pose as the switch to learn your access passwords The most secure way to acquire the switch s public key for Configuring Secure Shell SSH Configuring the Switch for SSH Operation distribution to clients is to use a direct serial connection between the switch and a management device laptop PC or UNIX workstation as described below The public key generated by the switch consists of three parts separated by one blank space each Bit Size Exponent lt e gt Modulus lt n gt 896 35 427199470766077426366625060579924214851527933248752021855126493 2934075407047828604329304580321402733049991670046707698543529734853020 0176777055355544556880992231580238056056245444224389955500310200336191 3610469786020092436232649374294060627777506601747146563337525446401 Figure 6 7 Example of a Public Key Generated by the Switch The generated public key on the switch is always 896 bits With a direct serial connection from a management station to the switch 1 Use a terminal application such as HyperTerminal to disp
318. w the first choice TACACS authentication device Addr Opens Closes borts Errors Pkts Rx Pkts Tx 10 28 227 10 0 10 28 227 15 o Figure 4 5 Example of the Switch After Assigning a Different First Choice Server To remove the 10 28 227 15 device as a TACACS server you would use this command ProCurve config no tacacs server host 10 28 227 15 Configuring an Encryption Key Use an encryption key in the switch if the switch will be requesting authentication from a TACACS server that also uses an encryption key If the server expects a key but the switch either does not provide one or provides an incorrect key then the authentication attempt will fail Use a global encryption key if the same key applies to all TACACS servers the switch may use for authentication attempts Use a per server encryption key if different servers the switch may use will have different keys For more details on encryption keys see Using the Encryption Key on page 4 23 To configure north01 as a global encryption key ProCurve config tacacs server key north01 To configure north01 as a per server encryption key ProCurve config tacacs server host 10 28 227 63 key north01 An encryption key can contain up to 100 characters without spaces and is likely to be case sensitive in most TACACS server applications To delete a global encryption key from the switch use this command ProCurve config no tacacs server key
319. witch B Switch B s Port B5 Switch A Port A1 Configured as an 802 1X Supplicant RADIUS Server Figure 8 2 Example of Supplicant Operation 1 When port Al on switch A is first connected to a port on switch B or if the ports are already connected and either switch reboots port Al begins sending start packets to port B5 on switch B e If after the supplicant port sends the configured number of start packets it does not receive a response it assumes that switch B is not 802 1X aware and transitions to the authenticated state If switch B is operating properly and is not 802 1X aware then the link should begin functioning normally but without 802 1X security e If after sending one or more start packets port Al receives a request packet from port B5 then switch B is operating as an 802 1X authenticator The supplicant port then sends a response ID packet Switch B forwards this request to a RADIUS server 2 The RADIUS server then responds with an MD5 access challenge that switch B forwards to port Al on switch A Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X General Operating Rules and Notes Note 3 Port Al replies with an MD5 hash response based on its username and password or other unique credentials Switch B forwards this response to the RADIUS server 4 The RA
320. witch and also enables the Reset button to be used with the Clear button page 2 9 to reset the switch to its factory default configuration Default Enabled Password Recovery Shows whether the switch is configured with the ability to recover a lost password Refer to Password Recovery Process on page 2 17 Default Enabled CAUTION Disabling this option removes the ability to recover a password on the switch Disabling this option is an extreme measure and is not recommended unless you have the most urgent need for high security If you disable password recovery and then lose the password you will have to use the Reset and Clear buttons page 2 9 to reset the switch to its factory default configuration and create a new password 2 11 Configuring Username and Password Security Front Panel Security For example show front panel security produces the following output when the switch is configured with the default front panel security settings ProCurve config show front panel security Clear Password Enabled Reset on clear Disabled Factory Reset Enabled Password Recovery Enabled Figure 2 7 The Default Front Panel Security Settings Disabling the Clear Password Function of the Clear Button on the Switch s Front Panel Syntax no front panel security password clear In the factory default configuration pressing the Clear button on the switch s front panel erases any local use
321. witch i f 7 Station a 2 User to Switch login password and lt _ SSH i enable password authentication i Server j options i Local TACACS l Figure 6 2 Switch User Authentication SSH on the ProCurve switches covered in this guide supports these data encryption methods m 3DES 168 bit m DES 56 bit Note The ProCurve switches covered in this guide use the RSA algorithm for internally generated keys v1 v2 shared host key amp v1 server key However ProCurve switches support both RSA and DSA DSS keys for client authenti cation All references to either a public or private key mean keys generated using these algorithms unless otherwise noted 6 3 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Terminology Terminology m SSH Server A ProCurve switch with SSH enabled m Key Pair A pair of keys generated by the switch or an SSH client application Each pair includes a public key that can be read by anyone and a private key that is held internally in the switch or by a client m PEM Privacy Enhanced Mode Refers to an ASCII formatted client public key that has been encoded for portability and efficiency SSHv2 client public keys are typically stored in the PEM format See figures 6 3 and 6 4 for examples of PEM encoded ASCII and non encoded ASCII keys m Private Key An internally generated key used in the authentication process A private key generated by the switch is not
322. witch is configured for RADIUS authentication the switch then forwards the request to a RADIUS server i The server responds with an access challenge which the switch forwards to the client ii The client then provides identifying credentials such as a user certificate which the switch forwards to the RADIUS server iii The RADIUS server then checks the credentials provided by the client iv Ifthe client is successfully authenticated and authorized to con nect to the network then the server notifies the switch to allow access to the client Otherwise access is denied and the port remains blocked e If802 1X port access on the switch is configured for local authenti cation then i The switch compares the client s credentials with the username and password configured in the switch Operator or Manager level 8 10 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X General 802 1X Authenticator Operation ii Ifthe client is successfully authenticated and authorized to con nect to the network then the switch allows access to the client Otherwise access is denied and the port remains blocked Switch Port Supplicant Operation This operation provides security on links between 802 1X aware switches For example suppose that you want to connect two switches where m Switch A has port Al configured for 802 1X supplicant operation You want to connect port Al on switch A to port B5 on s
323. x aaa port access web based dhcp addr lt ip address mask gt Specifies the base address mask for the temporary IP pool used by DHCP The base address can be any valid ip address nota multicast address Valid mask range value is lt 255 255 240 0 255 255 255 0 gt Default 192 168 0 0 255 255 255 0 Syntax aaa port access web based dhcp lease lt 5 25 gt Specifies the lease length in seconds of the temporary IP address issued for Web Auth login purposes Default 10 seconds 3 18 Web and MAC Authentication Configuring Web Authentication Syntax no aaa port access web based e lt port lis gt Enables web based authentication on the specified ports Use the no form of the command to disable web based authentication on the specified ports Syntax aaa port access web based e lt port list gt auth vid lt vid gt no aaa port access web based e lt port list gt auth vid Specifies the VLAN to use for an authorized client The Radius server can override the value accept response includes a vid If auth vid is 0 no VLAN changes occur unless the RADIUS server supplies one Use the no form of the command to set the auth vid to 0 Default 0 Syntax aaa port access web based e lt port list gt client limit lt 1 2 gt Specifies the maximum number of authenticated clients to allow on the port Default 1 Syntax no aaa port access web based e lt port list gt client moves
324. xportable to the switch The switch can only store ten client key pairs m The switch s own public private key pair and the optional client public key file are stored in the switch s flash memory and are not affected by reboots or the erase startup config command m Once you generate a key pair on the switch you should avoid re generating the key pair without a compelling reason Otherwise you will have to re introduce the switch s public key on all management stations clients you previously set up for SSH access to the switch In some situations this can temporarily allow security breaches m On ProCurve switches that support stacking when stacking is enabled SSH provides security only between an SSH client and the stack manager Communications between the stack commander and stack members are not secure m The switch does not support outbound SSH sessions Thus if you Telnet from an SSH secure switch to another SSH secure switch the session is not secure 6 8 Configuring Secure Shell SSH Configuring the Switch for SSH Operation Configuring the Switch for SSH Operation SSH Related Commands in This Section Page show ip ssh 6 17 show crypto client public key lt manager operator gt keylist str 6 26 lt babble fingerprint gt show crypto host public key lt babble fingerprint gt 6 14 show authentication 6 21 crypto key lt generate zeroize gt ssh rsa 6 11 ip ssh 6 16 filetransfer 6
325. yntax aaa port access supplicant ethernet lt port list gt To enable supplicant operation on the designated ports execute this command without any other parameters After doing this you can use the command again with the following parameters to configure supplicant oper tion Use one instance of the command for each parameter you want to configure The no form disables supplicant operation on the designated port s 8 44 Configuring Port Based and Client Based Access Control 802 1X Configuring Switch Ports To Operate As Supplicants for 802 1X Connections to Other Switches identity lt username gt Sets the username and password to pass to the authen ticator port when a challenge request packet is received from the authenticator port in response to an authen tication request If the intended authenticator port is configured for RADIUS authentication then lt user name gt and lt password gt must be the username and password expected by the RADIUS server If the intended authenticator port is configured for Local authentication then lt username gt and lt password gt must be the username and password configured on the Authenticator switch Defaults Null secret Enter secret lt password gt Repeat secret lt password gt Sets the secret password to be used by the port suppli cant when an MD5 authentication request is received from an authenticator The switch prompts you to enter the secr

HP Q.11. (2510-24) User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents